JP7457682B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which reserved information is acquired and stored on the condition that a gaming ball enters the starting hole, and a lottery for a big prize is executed based on the reserved information. During play, an effect image suggesting the result of the lottery for a big prize is displayed, and the number of reserved information items is notified to the player.

Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a power failure recovery image is displayed when the power is turned on, and an effect image and the number of pending information are displayed after a certain period of time has elapsed.

JP2017-29231A

When the power is restored, various images are displayed based on commands sent from the main control board, but the commands may not be received properly due to some reason such as noise. In this case, depending on the displayed image, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, the present invention aims to reduce players' distrust when power is restored after a power outage.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a starting area provided in a gaming area where a game ball flows down, and a predetermined information acquisition that obtains predetermined information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area. means, a determining means for making a determination based on the predetermined information, a gaming profit granting means for granting a gaming profit to a player based on a determination result of winning being derived from the determination of validity, and a background image. , and an effect execution means for displaying an effect image on an image display section that corresponds to the predetermined information and includes a predetermined image suggesting the predetermined number of information , and the effect execution means is configured to perform a display operation after power is turned on. When a predetermined command is received , the background image is displayed, and the predetermined image is not displayed, and when the predetermined information is acquired after power is turned on, the predetermined image can be displayed if the background image is displayed. and is characterized in that the predetermined image is not displayed unless the background image is displayed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce a player's sense of distrust when recovering from a power outage.

It is a perspective view of a game machine showing a state in which a door according to a simultaneous rotation reference example is opened. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to a simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize winning hole concerning a simultaneous spin reference example. A block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game in the simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is an address map of a memory area used by a main CPU according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. This is a diagram explaining the random number judgment table for determining a jackpot at low probability in the simultaneous spin reference example. This is a diagram explaining the random number judgment table for determining a jackpot at high probability in the simultaneous spin reference example. It is a figure explaining a winning pattern random number determination table and a small winning pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. (a) is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a variation time determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state and fluctuation time concerning a simultaneous play reference example. It is the 1st figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining a winning decision random number judgment table concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. (a) is a diagram explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in accordance with the original game nature according to the simultaneous play reference example. A figure explaining the transition of game states when play is not performed properly in the simultaneous spin reference example. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating sub-command group set processing in the main control board according to a simultaneous execution reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off evacuation process in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in a main control board according to a simultaneous running reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process in a main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st starting port passage process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd starting port passage process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening passage process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram explaining a special game management phase according to a simultaneous play reference example. It is a flowchart explaining special game management processing in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern change processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 1st flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 2nd flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board based on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol hit determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the number cut management process in the main control board according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the processing during special pattern changes in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining pattern forced stop processing in the main control board concerning a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening control process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening end wait process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram explaining a normal game management phase according to a simultaneous play reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. A flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display processing on the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the control processing for opening the winning port of a normal electric device in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric accessory prize winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick winning slot end wait processing in the main control board for the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the non-reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the normal reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of loss according to the performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot according to the performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuating performance when the reach development performance concerning a performance reference example is performed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation performance of the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern concerning a performance reference example. A diagram explaining a variable performance decision table related to a performance reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the hold display performance concerning a performance reference example. (a) is a diagram explaining the final pending display pattern determination table according to the production reference example, and (b) is a diagram explaining the previous suspension display pattern determination table according to the production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining sub CPU initialization processing in a sub control board concerning a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the sub-timer interruption process in the sub-control board based on a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch designation command reception process in the sub-control board based on a performance reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation command reception process in the sub-control board concerning a performance reference example. It is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the internal configuration of the performance display device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating subcommand group setting processing in the main control board according to the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining processing during special pattern fluctuation in the main control board in the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an image related to the return of screen display according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating processing executed by the main control board and various commands sent to the sub control board in various processings according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating sub CPU initialization processing in the sub control board according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating command reception interrupt processing in the sub control board according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of the big winning a prize opening concerning a 2nd example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second example. It is a figure explaining the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second example. It is a figure explaining the winning pattern random number determination table based on 2nd Example. It is a figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table based on 2nd Example. It is a figure explaining the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening and the opening/closing mode of the probability variable area by the movable member according to the second example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a game status setting table according to the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game state concerning a 2nd example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the gaming state according to the original gaming nature according to the second example. 7 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing in the main control board according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining probability variable area passing processing in the main control board concerning a 2nd example. It is a flowchart explaining the number cut management process in the main control board according to the second example. It is a flowchart explaining special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening end wait process in the main control board according to the second example. A figure showing an example of a presentation in the main presentation display unit in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch designation command reception process in the sub control board according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining special figure stop designation command reception processing in a sub control board concerning a 2nd example. It is a flowchart explaining the gaming state change designation command reception process in the sub control board according to the second example. 12 is a flowchart illustrating special number of times command reception processing in the sub control board according to the second embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating opening command reception processing in the sub control board according to the second embodiment.

The following describes in detail preferred embodiments of the present invention with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific values shown in the embodiments are merely examples to facilitate understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In this specification and drawings, elements that have substantially the same functions and configurations are given the same reference numerals to avoid duplicated explanations, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are not shown.

To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a simultaneous rotation reference example, the mechanical and electrical configurations of the so-called simultaneous rotation machine and the specific processing on each board are explained. Then, as a performance reference example, specific performances that can be executed on the simultaneous rotation machine and specific processing related to the performances are explained. After that, as an embodiment of the present invention, configurations that differ from each of the reference examples are specifically explained.

<Simultaneous rotation reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and shows a state in which the door is opened. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a surrounding space is formed by four sides arranged in a substantially rectangular shape, an inner frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism, and The front frame 106 is attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable.

The middle frame 104, like the outer frame 102, has four sides arranged in a roughly rectangular shape to form an enclosed space, and the game board 108 is held in this enclosed space. The front frame 106 also holds a glass or resin transparent plate 110. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed against the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110 face each other roughly parallel, maintaining a predetermined distance between them, and the game board 108 can be seen through the transparent plate 110 from the front side of the gaming machine 100.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to a reference example of simultaneous play. As shown in this figure, an operating handle 112 that protrudes toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower part of the front frame 106. This operation handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate it, and when the player rotates the operation handle 112 to perform a firing operation, the operation handle 112 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112, and when the player performs a firing operation, the operation handle 112 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112. A game ball is fired by the firing mechanism. The game ball launched in this manner ascends between the rails 114a and 114b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116.

The game area 116 is a space formed between the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110, and is an area where the game balls can flow down or roll. The game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails and windmills (not shown), and the game ball guided into the game area 116 collides with the nails and windmills, causing it to flow down and roll in irregular directions. I have to.

The game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b, in which the degree of entry of game balls is different depending on the firing strength of the firing mechanism, and game balls can be shot separately. The first gaming area 116a is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second gaming area 116b is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100. It is located on the right side. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the game area 116, game balls fired by the firing mechanism with a firing strength lower than the predetermined strength enter the first game area 116a and are fired with a firing strength equal to or higher than the predetermined strength. The game ball that has been played enters the second game area 116b.

In addition, the gaming area 116 is provided with a general prize opening 118 into which game balls can enter, a first fixed starting opening 120A, a first variable starting opening 120B, a second starting opening 122, and a normal figure operating opening 125. , When a game ball enters these general prize opening 118, first fixed starting opening 120A, first variable starting opening 120B, second starting opening 122, and normal pattern operation opening 125, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. It will be done. In addition, below, 120 A of 1st fixed starting ports and the 1st variable starting port 120B are named generically, and are called the 1st starting port 120.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting region is provided within the first starting port 120, and a second starting region is provided within the second starting port 122. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and enters the first starting area or the second starting area, one of the plurality of special symbols provided in advance is selected. A lottery is held to determine the No. 1 special symbol. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not a large winning game or a small winning game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, the player not only obtains a predetermined prize ball but also has the opportunity to obtain the right to receive various gaming benefits. becomes.

Further, the first fixed starting port 120A, the second starting port 122, and the standard operating port 125 are constituted by fixed starting ports that are open to allow game balls to enter at all times. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and the ease with which the game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B changes depending on the state of the movable piece 120b. Consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, and during this time, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or when a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125, a lottery of normal symbols to be described later is performed. If a winner is won in this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be in the open state for a predetermined period of time. When the movable piece 120b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. In this way, the movable piece 120b has an open state that allows a game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B, and an open state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B than in the open state. Otherwise, it functions as a movable member (variable start winning device) that transitions to the closed state, which is impossible.

Note that the first fixed starting port 120A allows only game balls flowing down the first gaming area 116a to enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 allow entry of game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b. It is placed in a position where only the ball can enter. Note that a game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed starting port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier for the ball to enter than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, a game ball flowing down the first game area 116a may enter the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122, but in this case, a game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first variable starting port 120B and the second variable starting port 122. It is desirable that the ball be placed in a position where it is easier for the ball to enter the first game area 116a than the game ball flowing down. In any case, the first fixed starting port 120A is arranged at a position where at least a game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are arranged at least in a position where a game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a can enter. 2. It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the game area 116b be placed at a position where the ball can enter.

Furthermore, a first big winning hole 126 and a second big winning hole 128 are provided in the second gaming area 116b. The first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are arranged at positions where only game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b can enter. However, the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first gaming area 116a and the second gaming area 116b can enter.

The first big prize opening 126 is provided with an opening/closing door 126b that can be opened and closed. Normally, the opening/closing door 126b closes the first big winning opening 126 to prevent game balls from entering the first big winning opening 126. The ball has become impossible. Specifically, in the closed state, the opening/closing door 126b is flush with the board surface of the game board 108, and the game ball flows down in front of the first big prize opening 126. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big prize game is executed, the opening/closing door 126b is opened and functions as a tray that guides the game ball to the first big winning hole 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 126. The ball becomes possible. Then, when a game ball enters the first big prize opening 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second large prize opening 128 is provided below the first large prize opening 126 in the second game area 116b. The second large prize opening 128 is equipped with a movable piece 128b, which is normally maintained in a closed state. In contrast, when a small prize game described below is played, the movable piece 128b is controlled to an open state, allowing a game ball to enter the second large prize opening 128. In the following, the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the large prize openings.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the second grand prize opening 128 according to a simultaneous spinning reference example. A structure 129 that protrudes toward the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 129 is surrounded by the four sides located in the left-right direction and the front-back direction of the gaming machine 100, as well as the bottom, and has an opening formed in the upper part. The opening formed in the upper part of this structure 129 becomes the second big prize opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided at the top of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. .

The movable piece 128b protrudes into the game area 116 where the game balls roll and flow down, facing above the game machine 100. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state, the game balls flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) fall onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the structure 129 has a base that is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction, and the right side of the game machine 100 is slightly longer in the height direction than the left side. Therefore, the second large winning opening 128 is slightly lower on the left side of the game machine 100 than the right side, and the movable piece 128b maintained in a closed state is inclined so that the left side of the game machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, the game ball that falls onto the movable piece 128b will roll slowly from right to left on the movable piece 128b, as shown by the arrow in Figure 3 (a).

Then, when a small winning game to be described later is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to the open state in which the second big prize opening 128 is opened. Here, the movable piece 128b changes from the closed state to the open state by sliding toward the back side of the game board 108, as shown in FIG. 3(b). As a result, when changing from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second grand prize opening 128 under its own weight.

In this manner, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly inclined to ensure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, when the movable piece 128b changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is guided into the second grand prize opening 128. With the above configuration, even if the time for maintaining the movable piece 128b in the open state is set slightly, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second big prize opening 128. In other words, the time required to maintain the movable piece 128b in the open state, which is necessary to allow a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second big prize opening 128, can be shortened. Note that a hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed on the back side of the structure 129, and the game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108. . Then, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

In addition, although the structure of the 2nd big prize opening 128 was demonstrated here, the 1st variable starting opening 120B is also the same structure as the 2nd big winning opening 128. That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B protrudes to the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. In the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides toward the back side of the game board 108, allowing the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the right side of the movable piece 128b is higher than the left side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front, whereas the left side of the movable piece 120b is on the right side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front. located higher than.

Here, the board structure of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the top of the second game area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b either enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 pays out one game ball as a prize ball for each game ball that enters.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a big winning game or a small winning game. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is to be opened.

Directly below the second starting opening 122 and the gate 124, a first big winning opening 126 is provided. When the first big prize opening 126 is in the open state, all of the game balls that have passed through the gate 124 and flowed down are arranged so as to enter the first big prize opening 126. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only in the big prize game. In other words, the first big winning hole 126 can be said to be a big winning hole exclusively for big prize games. When a game ball enters the first big prize opening 126 during a big prize game, a predetermined number of two or more (15 in this case) game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters. .

A first variable starting opening 120B is provided below the first big winning opening 126. In addition, an out port 131 is provided between the first big winning port 126 and the first variable starting port 120B. The out port 131 is the entrance of a passage for discharging game balls from the gaming area 116, and even if a game ball enters the out port 131, no prize ball is paid out.

Nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that most (for example, 90% or more) of the game balls that have flowed down from the first big prize opening 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. In addition, a part (for example, 1% to 10%) of the game balls that have flowed downward from the first big prize opening 126 are guided to the out opening 131 by these nails.

When the first variable start opening 120B is in a closed state, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. If the movable piece 120b opens while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable start opening 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable start opening 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not a big prize game or a small prize game will be played.

Game balls that have not entered the first variable starting port 120B fall from above the movable piece 120b to the right side of the gaming machine 100 when viewed from the front. A second big winning opening 128 is provided below the first variable starting opening 120B, and most of the game balls that fall from above the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second big winning opening 128. do. The game ball on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls from the right side to the left side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spin reference example, the second large prize opening 128 is opened only in the small winning game. In other words, the second big winning hole 128 can be said to be a big winning hole exclusively for small winning games. When the movable piece 128b is opened while the game balls are rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second big prize opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128 during a small winning game, a predetermined number of two or more (15 in this case) game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters. It will be done.

A normal figure operation opening 125 is provided at the lower left of the second big prize opening 128. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls that fall downward from above the second big prize opening 128 enter the normal pattern operation opening 125. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the common figure operation opening 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the normal pattern operating port 125, it is determined whether or not to open the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b), similarly to when the game ball passes through the gate 124. A lottery will be held.

In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 116, there are game balls that did not enter any of the general prize opening 118, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 122, normal figure operation opening 125, and big winning opening. A discharge port 130 is provided for discharging the water from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The gaming machine 100 includes an effect display device 200 consisting of a liquid crystal display device, an effect accessory device 202 consisting of a movable device, and an effect display device 200 that performs effects while the game is in progress, etc., and an effect display device 202 consisting of a movable device, which is controlled in various lighting modes and emitting colors. A production lighting device 204 consisting of a lamp, an audio output device 206 consisting of a speaker, and a production operation device 208 that receives operations from a player are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display section 200a consisting of an image display section that displays an image, and the main effect display section 200a is visible from the front side of the gaming machine 100 at approximately the center of the game board 108. It is arranged as possible. Various effects will be executed on this main effect display section 200a, such as three effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c being displayed in a variable manner as shown in the figure.

The performance accessory device 202 is placed in front of the main performance display section 200a, and is usually retracted in a state where it is divided into a plurality of components at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108, so that the player can It is no longer visible. Then, when each component moves to a movable position in front of the main effect display section 200a by driving the actuator while the above-mentioned effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are being displayed in a variable manner, the front surface of the main effect display section 200a Each component unites to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a jackpot.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided in the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is controlled to be lit in various ways according to the image etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the top of the front frame 106 or at the bottom of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front of the gaming machine 100 in accordance with the images displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

The production operation device 208 is composed of a button that accepts a pressing operation by a player, and is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the gaming machine 100 and at a position below the transparent plate 110. This effect operation device 208 is activated according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when it receives an operation from the player within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. The performance is executed.

In addition, the reference numeral 132 in the figure is an upper tray into which the prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and the game balls lent out from the game ball rental device are guided, and when the upper tray 132 is full of game balls, the game balls are It will be guided to the lower tray 134. Further, a ball removal hole (not shown) for ejecting game balls from the lower tray 134 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 134. This ball removal hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but by pressing down the ball removal knob 134a, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball removal knob 134a, and the ball removal hole is closed. It is possible to discharge game balls from below the lower tray 134.

In addition, on the game board 108, a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, and a first special symbol reserved are located outside the gaming area 116 and in a position that is visible to the player. A display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a regular symbol reservation display 170, and a right hit notification display 172 are provided. Each of these displays 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game, and details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to a simultaneous play reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. This main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or uses the results of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, and a first fixed start port that detects that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting port 120A. A starting port detection switch 120As, a first variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B, and a second variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122. A starting port detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a normal pattern operation port detection switch 125s that detects that a game ball has entered the normal pattern operation port 125, and a first large A first big winning hole detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered the winning hole 126, and a second big winning hole detection switch 128s that detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 128 are connected. Detection signals are input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting opening 120B, and a first big prize opening that operates the opening/closing door 126b that opens and closes the first big prize opening 126. The solenoid 126c and the second large winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 128 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the first variable starting opening 120B and the first large winning opening. The opening and closing of the winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 is controlled.

Furthermore, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display 168. A symbol holding display 170 and a right hit notification display 172 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the display of each of these displays.

Furthermore, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back side of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible by a dedicated key. On the condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, it is possible to change and confirm the setting value. Although details will be described later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous playback reference example, any of the six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and the game machine 100 is set according to the stored registered setting value. The game progresses. Here, it is assumed that the setting value is in six stages, but the setting value may be provided in only two stages, high setting and low setting, or may be provided in other plural stages. Furthermore, the set value is not essential, and the degree of advantage does not need to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back side of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed down, and the pressing operation of this RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input to the main control board 300 from the RAM clear switch 182s. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

Furthermore, a performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back side of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays registered setting values and base ratios on the performance display monitor 184.

The gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spin reference example is broadly divided into special games that are started mainly by a game ball entering the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and regular games that are started by a game ball passing through the gate 124 or entering the regular operation port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing the special games and regular games, as well as data and tables required for various games.

Further, a payout control board 310 and a sub-control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300. The payout control board 310 performs control for shooting game balls and control for paying out prize balls. This payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to this payout control board 310, and various information regarding game progress outputted from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312. , and will be output to the hall computer of the game parlor.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage section to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on a payout number designation command sent from the main control board 300 to control it so that a specified number of prize balls are paid out to the player. At this time, the number of paid out game balls is detected by a payout ball count switch 316s, and it is possible to know whether the prize balls to be paid out have been paid out to the player.

Further, a tray full detection switch 318s that detects the full state of the lower tray 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. This tray full detection switch 318s is provided in a passage that guides game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower tray 134, and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310.

When a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 134 and the game ball becomes full, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower tray 134 and are sent from the tray full detection switch 318s toward the payout control board 310. , game ball detection signals are continuously input. When the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full, and sends a full tray command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after transmitting the full plate command, it is determined that the full state has been canceled, and a full plate release command is sent to the main control board 300.

Further, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 that controls the launch of game balls. A touch sensor 112s that is provided on the operating handle 112 and detects that the player has touched the operating handle 112, and an operating volume 112a that detects the operating angle of the operating handle 112 are connected to the payout control board 310. ing. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the firing control circuit 320 controls to energize the firing solenoid 112c provided in the game ball firing device to fire the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls various effects such as during gaming and on standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. . The sub CPU 330a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on commands transmitted from the main control board 300, input signals from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and controls execution of effects. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub-control board 330, the sub-CPU 330a, sub-ROM 330b, and sub-RAM 330c work together to function as a sub-main, an image control section, an accessory control section, a lighting control section, and an audio control section. The sub-main determines the content of the performance to be executed in response to various input commands, and manages and supervises the execution of the performance. The image control section performs image display control to display an image on the main effect display section 200a. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as symbols, backgrounds, and subtitles to be displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and the image control section reads out the image data from the sub ROM 330b to a VRAM (not shown) and Controls image display on the effect display section 200a.

The prop control unit drives actuators in accordance with the performance management by the sub-main, and controls the movement of the prop device 202. The lighting control unit controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 204. The audio control unit controls the audio output to output audio from the audio output device 206. Sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data, such as audio and music, that is output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from sub-ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined effect when an operation detection signal is input from the effect operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the effect operation device 208 is pressed or rotated.

Note that a power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. Further, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor.

FIG. 5 is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous operation reference example. Note that in FIG. 5, addresses are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and "H" indicates that they are hexadecimal numbers. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b includes a used area (0000H to 1A7AH) for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the used area for processing for performing tests specified by gaming machine regulations. and an unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing programs and data for executing processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184). and is provided.

The used areas of the main ROM 300b include a program area (0000H to 0A89H) where a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored, an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H) where data other than the program is stored. ~1A7AH) are provided. Note that the used area may not include unused areas (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The unused area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (2000H to 27FFH) in which programs for executing tests specified by gaming machine regulations and programs for displaying the performance display monitor 184 are stored; A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) is provided in which data other than these programs is stored.

In addition to the used and unused areas, the memory area of the main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH) and a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) where arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored. ), an unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for the main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c consists of a used area (F000H to F1FFH) that is used temporarily when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and an area other than the used area, which is specified by gaming machine regulations. An unused area (F210H to F228H) is provided that is used temporarily when a program for performing a specified test or for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

The used areas of the main RAM 300c include a work area (F000H to F12AH) used temporarily when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a work area (F12BH to F1D7H) used to control the progress of the game. A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) is provided for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program. Note that the used area may not include unused areas (F12BH to F1D7H).

The unused area of the main RAM 300c has a work area (F210H -F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data while these programs are being executed.

Furthermore, in addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main RAM 300c includes an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH).

In this way, the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c have areas used for controlling the progress of the game, processing for conducting tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. An unused area used for executing the process is provided separately.

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area that separates the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area is clear, and the program for controlling the progress of the game is When the program is executed, an unused area is used, and when the program is executed for the process to perform the test specified by the gaming machine regulations or the process to control the display of the performance display monitor 184. Prevents the used area from being used.

Note that the unused area provided between the used area and the unused area should be at least 1 byte or more, and from the perspective of fraud prevention, it is preferably 4 bytes or more, and it is set to 16 bytes or more. It is more desirable. Although data writing and reading are prohibited in the unused area, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing to prevent fraud.

Next, a game in the gaming machine 100 as a reference example of simultaneous play will be explained together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous play reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, are played in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in either the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and in the normal game, the game progresses in the game state of the non-time saving game state, the medium time saving game state, or the time saving game state. The game progresses.

Details of each game state will be described later, but the low probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to play the big prize game in which the big prize opening is opened is set low, and the high probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to play the big prize game is set high. In addition, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is less likely to be in the open state and the game ball is less likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B, and the intermediate time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than the non-time-saving game state and the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B. In addition, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is even more likely to be in the open state than the intermediate time-saving game state and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable start opening 120B. In addition, in the time-saving game mode, if game balls continue to be shot toward the second game area 116b during play, the game balls are set to decrease slightly or not at all.

As mentioned above, the special game and the normal game proceed simultaneously, so in the simultaneous play reference example, the low probability game state or high probability game state, the non-time saving game state, the medium time saving game state, the time saving game A gaming state is a combination of any of the states. Below, for ease of understanding, the gaming states related to special games, that is, the low probability gaming states and the high probability gaming states, will be referred to as special gaming states, and the gaming states related to normal games, that is, non-time saving gaming states, medium The time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are sometimes called the normal gaming state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to launch a game ball into the game area 116, and when the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, the player is prompted to play the game. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to award a profit (hereinafter referred to as a "major lottery"). In this big winning lottery, if you win a jackpot, the big winning opening will be opened and a big winning game will be executed in which you can enter the game ball into the big winning opening, and the game state after the big winning game is over. is set to one of the gaming states listed above. Below, the major prize lottery method will be explained.

As will be described in more detail later, when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, various random number values related to the big prize lottery (jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, variable pattern random number) are obtained, and these random number values are stored in the special symbol reserve memory area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reserve, and the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 are collectively referred to as special 2 reserve.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservations are stored in order from the first storage part of the second special figure reservation storage area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if no reservation is stored in any of the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first storage section Memorize special 1 reservation. Further, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 120 with the special 1 hold stored in the first to third storage units, the special 1 hold is stored in the fourth storage unit. Remember. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special symbol reservation storage area in the same manner as described above. The special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number) that is not listed.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area are each set to four. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the game ball enters the first starting port 120. Special 1 pending is not newly memorized due to the entry of the game ball. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special figure reservation storage area, the game to the second starting port 122 is Special 2 suspension will not be newly memorized due to the ball entering the ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous play reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when starting the big prize lottery, that is, when determining a jackpot, a jackpot determination random number determination table is selected according to the gaming state, and based on the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number. A major lottery will be held.

In the low-probability game state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, there are six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the setting value is set to one of six levels, and the random number judgment for determining a jackpot when the probability is low corresponds to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer). A lottery is held with reference to the table.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in FIG. 6 (a). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10218, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/300.6, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 (registered setting value = 2), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6(b). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table b, when the jackpot decision random number is between 10001 and 10225, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot decision random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/291.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 3 (registered setting value = 3), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6(c). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10232, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined to be a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/282.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 4 (registered setting value = 4), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. 6(d). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10239, it is determined that it is a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined that it is a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/274.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value = 5), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6(e). will be held. According to this low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table e, when the jackpot decision random number is between 10001 and 10246, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot decision random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/266.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 6 (registered setting value = 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table f shown in Figure 6 (f). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table f, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10253, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/259.0, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/3.45.

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a random number determination table for determining a jackpot at high probability according to a reference example of simultaneous play. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. The high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value, similar to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table.

In the high probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7(a). will be held. According to this high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10620, it is determined that it is a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 38996, it is determined that it is a small hit, and other If it is a jackpot determination random number, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/105.7, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

Similarly, in the high probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the high probability jackpot shown in Fig. 7(b) to (f) A major prize lottery is performed with reference to the determined random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, a jackpot is determined when the respective jackpot determination random numbers are the values shown. Therefore, when the setting value is 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is about 1/102.4 to 1/91.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

As described above, the big prize lottery is held according to the registered setting value. At this time, the probability of winning a big prize differs according to the registered setting value, and it is easier to win a big prize when the registered setting value is large than when it is small. Note that here, even if the registered setting value differs, the probability of winning a small prize does not change, but the probability of winning a small prize may be different for each registered setting value. Also, a small prize is not required, and only either a big prize or a miss may be determined in the big prize lottery.

In addition, here, the probability of winning a jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered setting value, but the probability of winning a jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is Only the probability of winning may differ depending on the registered setting value.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the winning symbol random number determination table and the small winning symbol random number determination table for the simultaneous spin reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one winning symbol random number within the range of 0 to 99 is obtained. Then, when a "big win" determination result is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of special symbol is determined based on the obtained winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if the "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the winning pattern random number judgment table a for special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(a), if the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the winning pattern random number judgment table b for special 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(b), if the "small win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the small win pattern random number judgment table a for special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(c), and if the "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the small win pattern random number judgment table b for special 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 8(d). In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the big win is obtained, is called the big win pattern, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the small win is obtained is called the small win pattern, and the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the loss is obtained is called the loss pattern.

According to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b), depending on the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, As shown in the figure, jackpot symbols (special symbols A to J) are determined as special symbols. In addition, according to the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(c) and the special 2 small winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(d), the value of the acquired winning symbol random number Accordingly, as shown in the figure, small winning symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

In addition, when the big winning lottery result is a "loss" and the lottery result is derived by special 1 reservation, special symbol X is determined as a losing symbol without performing a lottery, and the lottery result is special 2 When the special symbol Y is derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as a losing symbol without performing a lottery. In other words, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the major prize lottery result is a "big hit", and is not referred to when the major prize lottery result is a "loss" or a "small win". Further, the small winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the large winning lottery result is a "small winning", and is not referred to when the large winning lottery result is a "big winning" or "loss". In addition, special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are small winning symbols, are collectively referred to simply as special symbol Z.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 9(b) is a diagram illustrating a variation time determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. Note that there are multiple fluctuation pattern random number determination tables for each reservation type, big prize lottery result (special symbol type), gaming state, number of fluctuations, and even number of reservations, but here, any fluctuation pattern random number determination table is provided. Table x will be explained. When the type of special symbol is determined as described above, a fluctuation pattern random number determination table as shown in FIG. One of the fluctuation pattern numbers is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random numbers in the range of 0 to 238 obtained in the above. As shown in FIG. 9(b), each variation pattern number is associated with a variation time. This variation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol is determined based on the special 1 reservation and a change pattern number, i.e., a change time, a change display of the symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 160 for the determined change time, and when the change time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160. Also, when a special symbol is determined based on the special 2 reservation and a change pattern number, i.e., a change time, a change display of the symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 162 for the determined change time, and when the change time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display 162. At this time, a losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160, and a loss is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and the next big role lottery based on the special 1 reservation can be executed, and a losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display 162, and a losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display 162, and a loss is confirmed as a result of the big role lottery, and the next big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation can be executed. On the other hand, when the big win symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, a big win is determined as a result of the big win lottery and a big win game is played, and when the small win symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display 162, a small win is determined as a result of the big win lottery and a small win game is played.

In this way, the fluctuation time defines the time for fluctuating display of the symbols on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, in other words, the time until the result of the big prize lottery is determined. However, a plurality of variation pattern random number determination tables for determining this variation time are provided depending on the reservation type, the result of the major prize lottery (special symbol type), the gaming state, etc. As a result, even if the values of the obtained fluctuation pattern random numbers are the same, different fluctuation pattern numbers, ie, fluctuation times, will be determined depending on the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

When the variation pattern number is determined as described above, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number is transmitted to the sub control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, the mode of the variation effect is determined based on the received variation pattern command, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the gaming state and variable time according to a reference example of simultaneous play. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined to form one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As already explained, there are two types of special gaming states: a low probability gaming state and a high probability gaming state, which have different jackpot winning probabilities. In addition, the normal game state is divided into three types: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state, which differ in the ease of entry of game balls into the first variable starting port 120B (entering frequency). It is being

Here, in the normal game, the ease with which a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, variable time, and opening time. Although details will be described later, in a normal game, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 or when a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125, the normal pattern hold is stored. Then, based on the stored standard pattern reservation, a standard pattern lottery is performed to determine whether or not to release the movable piece 120b. The result of this general drawing lottery is determined after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. When a winning result is confirmed as a result of the general drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the probability of winning in the normal drawing lottery, the variable time, and the opening time when the movable piece 120b is opened are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), six types of game states are provided by combining special game states and normal game states. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal drawing is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous spin reference example, a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state is called a normal state.

In the simultaneous spin reference example, the game state may be set to a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the game state that combines these two is called the most advantageous state. This most advantageous state is the most advantageous of the six game states, and is set so that if the game balls are fired appropriately, the number of game balls will gradually increase during play, even if a jackpot is not won.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the low probability game state and the time saving game state may be set. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability in the general lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the open time of the movable piece 120b is long. Below, a gaming state in which a low probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a low probability time saving state.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the high probability game state and the time saving game state may be set. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a high probability time saving state or a high probability precursor state. Note that the highly accurate time saving state and the highly accurate precursor state will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the simultaneous play reference example, the high probability game state and the medium time saving game state may be set. In addition, in the medium time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the general lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and lower than in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the open time of the movable piece 120b is long. This gaming state can be set when an unexpected situation occurs, such as when the game ball is not launched properly. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which a high probability gaming state and a medium time saving gaming state are combined will be referred to as a penalty state.

In addition, in the sub-control board 330, a production mode corresponding to the gaming state set in the main control board 300 is set. The performance mode defines the background image, BGM, etc. displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and the content of the performance differs depending on the performance mode. In other words, the player can identify the current gaming state based on the presentation mode.

As mentioned above, in the simultaneous play reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a fluctuation pattern random number determination table is selected according to the gaming state when the big winning lottery is held, the type of reservation, the number of fluctuations in the gaming state, and the type of symbol. The fluctuation pattern number is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial variable target is set for each gaming state. The actual variable object originally indicates the type of reservation for which the major prize lottery should be performed, and either special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation is set as the actual fluctuation object for each gaming state. Under normal conditions, special 1 reservation is set as subject to real fluctuation. Further, in the normal state, since the normal gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state, the first variable starting port 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to cause the game ball to enter the first fixed starting port 120A.

In the normal state, when a lottery for a big role is performed using the special 1 reserved symbol, which is the actual variable, and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table A is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table A, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Also, in the normal state, when a lottery for a big role is performed using the special 1 reserved symbol, and a big winning symbol is determined, table B is selected as the variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table B, the variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when a major prize lottery is performed by special 2 reservation which is not subject to actual fluctuation, table C is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table C, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes. In this way, by setting the variable time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 122, the big winning lottery based on special 2 reservation will not be possible. Opportunities for execution become extremely rare.

To be more specific, the second start hole 122 is provided in the second play area 116b, and is configured as a fixed start hole that game balls can always enter. Furthermore, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second start hole 122 is located in a position where game balls can enter more easily than the first start hole 120. Therefore, if the fluctuation time for the special 2 reservation is set to a short time in the normal state, the player will be given more opportunities than necessary to win the big prize lottery. Therefore, in accordance with the original playability in the normal state, the fluctuation time is set to a long time, such as 10 minutes, in order to appropriately launch game balls toward the first play area 116a.

In the most advantageous state, the special 2 reserve is set as the actual variable target. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to make the game ball enter the second starting hole 122. In the most advantageous state, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable target, table D is selected as the variable pattern random number judgment table regardless of the determined pattern type. According to this table D, the variable time is always determined to be 10 seconds. In addition, when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable target, in the most advantageous state, the impact on the game play is smaller than when a big role lottery is performed by the special 2 reserve, which is not an actual variable target in the normal state. Therefore, in the most advantageous state, the variable time when a big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve, which is not an actual variable target, is set to be short at 10 seconds.

In the most advantageous state, a major prize lottery is carried out using special 2 hold, which is a real variable target, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table E is selected as a variable pattern random number determination table. According to this table E, the variable time is determined within the range of 1 second to 3 seconds. In addition, in the most advantageous state, a big prize lottery is performed by special 2 reservation, and when a jackpot symbol is determined, table F is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table F, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, special 1 reservation is set to be subject to actual fluctuation. In addition, in the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, in these two gaming states, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In these two gaming states, the same variable pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two gaming states have in common that the normal gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In other words, when the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, when a big winning lottery is performed by special 1 reservation, which is subject to actual fluctuation, and a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table G is used as a fluctuation pattern random number determination table. selected. According to this table G, a variation time of 1 second is always determined. Further, in the case of a low probability time saving state and a high probability time saving state, a big winning lottery is performed by special 1 reservation, and when a jackpot symbol is determined, table H is selected as a fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table H, the variation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

In the high certainty precursor state, special 1 suspension is set as subject to real fluctuation. In addition, in the high certainty precursor state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the high probability precursor state, a big winning lottery is performed by special 1 reservation which is a real variation target, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table J is selected as a variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table J, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. In addition, in the high probability precursor state, when a big winning lottery is performed with special 1 pending and a jackpot symbol is determined, table K is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table K, the variation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, in a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, and a high-probability portent state, that is, when the normal gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, if a big prize lottery is held by special 2 reservation, which is not subject to actual fluctuation, Different fluctuation patterns are available depending on the number of fluctuations related to special 2 hold after each gaming state is set (number of times the symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the second special symbol display 162; hereinafter referred to as the "second fluctuation number"). A random number determination table is selected. Specifically, if the second variation number after the time saving gaming state is set is 4 or less, the special table is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this special table, the variable time is always determined to be one minute. On the other hand, if the second variation number after the time saving gaming state is set is 5 or more, table I is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to Table I, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, special 1 suspension is set to be subject to actual fluctuation. Further, in the penalty state, the normal game state is set to the medium time saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be open at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to cause the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the penalty state, a major prize lottery is performed by special 1 reservation, which is actually subject to fluctuation, and when a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined, table L is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table L, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the penalty state, when a big prize lottery is performed by special 1 reservation and a jackpot symbol is determined, table M is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table M, the variable time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, when a major prize lottery is carried out by special 2 reservation which is not subject to actual fluctuation, table N is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table N, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

As described above, a real variable target is set for each gaming state, and when a major prize lottery is performed based on the reservation type as a real variable target, the longest variable time is 100 seconds. On the other hand, when a major prize lottery is performed based on a reservation type that is not subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is approximately 10 minutes, and a game that is contrary to the original gameplay is prevented from being played.

In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, we will explain the case where the average fluctuation time of the high-accuracy time-saving state (second period) is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the high-accuracy precursor state (first period). The average fluctuation time of the state (second period) may be longer than the average fluctuation time of the highly probable precursor state (first period). In other words, the average of the fluctuation times in the highly reliable time saving state (second period) and the average of the fluctuation times in the highly reliable precursor state (first period) may be different.

FIG. 11 is a first diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operation ram set table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 12 is a first diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operation ram set table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure of 2. In addition, the special electric accessory actuation ram set table stores various data for controlling the big prize game or the small winning game, and during the big prize game or the small winning game, the special electric accessory actuating ram set table With reference to the table, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is controlled to be energized. In addition, in reality, there are multiple special electric accessory activation ram set tables for each type of special symbol (big winning symbol and small winning symbol), and the corresponding table is used as a major prize depending on the determined type of special symbol. Although it is set at the start of a game or a small winning game, here, for convenience of explanation, special symbol control data is shown for each symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 11, the big winning game consists of a plurality of round games in which the big prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is a round game that is executed only once. According to this special electric accessory activation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game starts), the maximum number of special electric accessory activations (performed during one big prize game or small winning game) (number of round games to be played), number of special electric accessory opening/closing switches (number of openings of the grand prize opening during one round), solenoid energization time (first grand prize opening solenoid 126c or second grand prize opening for each number of openings of the grand prize opening) The energization time of the grand prize opening solenoid 128c, that is, the opening time of one grand prize opening), the specified number (the maximum possible number of prizes to the grand prize opening in one round game), the effective time for closing the grand prize opening (round Closing time of the big prize opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game until the normal special game (variable symbol display described below) is resumed) However, as control data, each type of special symbol is stored in advance as shown in the figure.

Incidentally, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols A, B, and D are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big winning game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In these big winning games, the first big prize opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a small win is won due to special 1 retention and special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as the small win symbols, a small win game consisting of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the second big prize opening 128 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in one round game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, if a jackpot is won by holding special 2 and special symbols F, G, and I are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of four round games is executed. Ru. In this big winning game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 2 holding and special symbols H and J are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In this big prize game, each of the first big prize openings 126 is opened only once in the first to tenth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the first prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. One big prize opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, even when a small hit is won due to special 2 reservation and special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as the small winning symbols, a small winning game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time, which is the pause time between opening the second big prize opening 128 twice, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, considering the opening time of the second big prize opening 128 and the firing interval of the game balls, the game ball will win the second big prize during this small winning game. The probability of the ball hitting the opening 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous play reference example, the game balls tend to stay on the movable piece 128b that maintains the second big prize opening 128 in the closed state, and when the movable piece 128b changes to the open state, the movable The game balls staying on the piece 128b are guided into the second big prize opening 128. Therefore, by opening the second grand prize opening 128 twice for 0.1 seconds, two to three game balls will enter the second grand prize opening 128 on average.

In addition, in a small winning game where the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 3 times in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, three to four game balls enter the second big prize opening 128 on average.

Further, in a small winning game in which the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second large prize opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds x 12 times in one round game. Note that the in-round interval time in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, by continuing to fire game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the second big prize opening 128. can.

In addition, at the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of game balls fired and the number of paid prize balls. Therefore, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a special symbol Z4 is provided in which the opening for 0.1 seconds is made twice in the small winning game, and a special symbol Z5 is provided in which the opening is made for 0.1 seconds three times in the small winning game, By simply changing these selection ratios, the firing prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big prize game according to the simultaneous play reference example. In the simultaneous play reference example, when a big prize game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the reservation type, and the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol), and after the big prize game ends. Set the gaming state of.

When the game state at the time of winning a jackpot is a normal state or a penalty state, when winning a jackpot due to special 1 reservation which is subject to actual fluctuation, the game state after the jackpot game is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, a low probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving number") is set to 100 times. This means that the time-saving gaming state continues until the major prize lottery is performed 100 times. However, the above-mentioned number of time-savings indicates the maximum number of continuations in the time-saving gaming state of 1, and if you win a jackpot before reaching the number of continuations mentioned above, the gaming state will be set again. That will happen. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state is set after the end of the big prize game, if a jackpot lottery result is not derived in the time-saving gaming state and lottery results other than the jackpot are derived 100 times, the non-time-saving gaming state is set. The gaming state will be changed to (normal state).

In addition, if special patterns B or D are determined as the jackpot pattern, the machine will be set to a high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, "next" is set as the high-probability number of times, and the high-probability game state will continue until the next jackpot is won. In addition, "next" is set as the number of time-saving times, and the time-saving game state will continue until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, if special patterns B or D are determined, the high-probability time-saving state will continue after the big win game until the next jackpot is won.

Further, when special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability precursor state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time saving game state). At this time, "next time" is set as the high accuracy number of times, and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. When special symbols C and E are determined, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot is won, while the time-saving game state ends after 100 times. Therefore, when special symbols C and E are determined, the gaming state will shift to the most advantageous state after the big prize game and when the result of the big prize lottery has been derived 100 times.

Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, if the jackpot is won by special 2 reservation which is not subject to actual fluctuation, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as a jackpot symbol, the normal state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state). Further, when special symbols G to J are determined as jackpot symbols, a penalty state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a medium time saving game state). At this time, both the high-accuracy count and the time-saving count are set to "next time."

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, when the jackpot is won by a special 1 reserve that is not actually subject to change, the game state after the big win is set as follows. That is, if special pattern A is determined as the jackpot pattern, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In addition, if special patterns B to E are determined as the jackpot pattern, the game state after the big win is set to the same as the normal state and penalty state.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the most advantageous state, when winning the jackpot due to special 2 reservation which is subject to actual fluctuation, the gaming state after winning the jackpot game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as a jackpot symbol, a low probability time saving state is set (the special gaming state is a low probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Further, when special symbols G and I are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability time saving state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state and the normal game state is a time saving game state). At this time, the high-accuracy count and the time-saving count are set to "next time."

Further, when special symbols H and J are determined as jackpot symbols, a high probability precursor state is set (the special game state is a high probability game state, and the normal game state is a time saving game state). At this time, the high accuracy number of times is set to "next time" and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state, or a high probability premonition state, in other words, if the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the game state after the big win is set to the same as the normal state or the penalty state.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a winning determination random number determination table according to a simultaneous play reference example. When a game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal operating port 125, it is associated with whether or not to control the energization of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B. A normal symbol determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is performed.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, one winning determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 99, and this random number is Numerical values are stored in the general figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c, with an upper limit of four. In other words, the common pattern holding storage area includes four storage sections for saving winning determination random numbers. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 with the determined random number stored in all four storage units of the normal pattern holding storage area, the game ball No winning random numbers are stored based on the passage of the ball. Hereinafter, the winning determination random number stored in the normal pattern holding storage area when a game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 will be referred to as normal pattern holding.

When starting the regular lottery when the normal gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning determination random number determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state is referred to, as shown in FIG. 14(a). According to this winning random number determination table for non-time-saving gaming state, when the winning random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is 1 to 99, A losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when a winning symbol is determined in this general lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be in the open state, and when a losing symbol is determined, the first variable starting port is opened. The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, when starting the regular lottery in the medium time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the winning determination random number determination table for the medium time saving game state is referred to. According to this winning random number determination table for the medium time saving game state, when the winning random number is between 0 and 49, a winning symbol is determined as a type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is between 50 and 99. Then, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the medium time saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

In addition, when starting the regular lottery in the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the winning determination random number determination table for the time-saving gaming state is referred to. According to this winning random number determination table for the time-saving gaming state, when the winning random number is 0 to 98, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and when the winning random number is 99, the winning symbol is determined as a normal symbol. A losing symbol is determined as the symbol type. Therefore, the probability that a winning symbol is determined in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

15(a) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation time data table for the simultaneous spin reference example, and FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining the opening/closing control pattern table for the simultaneous spin reference example. As described above, when the normal symbol lottery is performed, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined. The normal symbol variation time data table is referenced when determining the variation time of the normal symbol when a winning symbol or a losing symbol is determined by the normal symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state or a medium time-saving game state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and when the game state is set to a time-saving game state, the variation time is determined to be 1 second. When the variation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed (blinking) for the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol display 168 lights up, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B performs opening/closing control as shown in FIG. 15(b). The energization is controlled by referring to the pattern table. In fact, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each gaming state, and depending on the gaming state when the normal symbol is determined, the corresponding table is set when the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c starts. .

Once the winning symbol is determined, the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to open and close by referring to the opening and closing control pattern table, as shown in Figure 15 (b). According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal power opening (waiting time until the first variable start port 120B starts opening), the maximum number of normal electric role opening/closing switching times (number of times the first variable start port 120B is opened), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the normal electric role solenoid 120c for each number of times the first variable start port 120B is opened, i.e., the opening time of the first variable start port 120B once), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be won into the first variable start port 120B during the full opening of the first variable start port 120B), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the first variable start port 120B, i.e., the pause time), the normal power effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), and the normal power end wait time (waiting time until the variable display of the normal pattern described later is resumed after the normal power effective state time has elapsed) are stored in advance for each game state as shown in the figure as control data for the first variable start port 120B.

In this way, by setting the winning probability of the normal symbol, the variable time, and the opening time, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player when game balls enter the first variable starting port 120B, the second starting port 122, the normal pattern operating port 125, and the big winning port) is the number of balls fired in the non-time saving gaming state. : Number of prize balls = 100:20, number of fired balls: number of prize balls = 100:40 in the medium time saving game state, number of fired balls: number of prize balls = 100:99 in the time saving game state.

The opening/closing conditions of the first variable starting port 120B define three elements: the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. In other words, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B, in each of the non-time-saving gaming state, the intermediate time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, It is possible to set the frequency of game balls entering the first variable starting port 120B and the firing prize ball ratio. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is just an example, and if you combine the three elements so that the firing prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state, good.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the game state according to the original playability according to the simultaneous play reference example. With the above configuration, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following gaming experience. Note that here, a case will be described in which the registration setting value is set to "1". First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in FIG. 16(a). In the normal state, since the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, the player shoots the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player will play what is called "left-handed play" in the normal state.

When a game ball enters the first fixed starting port 120A, special 1 reservation is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area. The special 1 reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are sequentially read out when the starting condition is met, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the read special 1 reservations. At this time, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300.6. In the normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot in the big winning lottery based on this special 1 reservation. Note that the firing prize ball ratio when the game balls are fired toward the first game area 116a is set to 100:20, and the number of game balls will decrease during the game.

Then, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won in the big winning lottery by special 1 reservation, the big winning game is executed. In this big winning game, a round game in which the first big prize opening 126 is opened is executed 4 or 10 times, and the player can win prize balls for 4 or 10 rounds. When a jackpot is won due to special 1 retention, one of the special symbols A to E is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the gaming state after the big winning game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 30%. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state, there is a 30% probability that the gaming state will shift to the low probability time saving state. In the low-probability time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the player enters the first variable start opening 120B with the game ball. 2. The player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the 2 game area 116b.

That is, in this low-probability time-saving state, as in the normal state, a game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot in the big winning lottery based on special 1 reservation. Note that in the low-probability time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/300.6, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b is frequently in the open state. Therefore, the firing prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a jackpot while reducing consumption of game balls.

In addition, when shifting to the low probability time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100, and if the jackpot is not won in the 100 big winning lottery, the gaming state will change to the normal state again (time saving exit) ).

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are special symbols B and D, the gaming state after the big prize game is the high accuracy time saving shown in FIG. 16(c). state. When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbols B and D will be determined as jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-accuracy time-saving state. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2. The player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the 2 game area 116b.

In other words, in this high-probability time-saving state, just like in the normal state, the player plays with the goal of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the big prize based on the special 1 reservation. In the high-probability time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/105.7, and since the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b frequently opens. Therefore, the ratio of fired prize balls is 100:99, and the player can play the lottery for the big prize while reducing the consumption of game balls. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving state, it can be said that the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed to be won.

In addition, in the normal state, if the jackpot pattern displayed on the first special pattern display 160 is the special pattern C or E, the game state after the big win game will be the high probability premonition state shown in FIG. 16(d). When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reserved, there is a 35% probability that the special pattern C or E will be determined as the jackpot pattern. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the game state will transition to the high probability premonition state. In the high probability premonition state, the actual variable target is set to the special 1 reserved, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player will hit the ball to the right, aiming at the second game area 116b, in order to get the game ball to enter the first variable start hole 120B.

When the special symbols C and E are determined, a highly accurate precursor state is set and the time saving number is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big prize game reaches 100, the time-saving game state ends and the normal game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. As a result, due to the time saving, the gaming state shifts to the most advantageous state shown in FIG. 16(e). As will be described in detail later, in the most dominant state, the number of game balls can be increased by simply continuing to shoot the game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the purpose of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to save time without winning the jackpot.

According to the above-mentioned special 1 suspension of real fluctuation objects in the high probability precursor state, high probability time saving state, and low probability time saving state, when a jackpot is won, special symbols A to E are determined as jackpot symbols. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big prize game, and the gaming state after the big prize game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). Further, when special symbols B and D are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the gaming state after the big prize game becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, four or ten round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the most dominant state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, special 2 reservation is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are sequentially read out when the starting condition is met, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the read special 2 reservations. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to about 1/105.7, and the winning probability of the small winning is set to about 1/3.45. In the most advantageous state, the main purpose of the game is to win the small prize in the major prize lottery based on this special 2 reservation.

Specifically, when game balls are fired into the second game area 116b, the ratio of prize balls paid out by entering the game balls into the second starting port 122 to the number of fired balls is 100:60 to 80. It is set to about. In the most advantageous state, small winning games are frequently played because the probability of winning a small winning is about 1/3.45 in the special lottery with special 2 reservation. Here, if a small hit is won due to special 2 reservation, small winning symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128. In the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z5 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large prize opening 128. Furthermore, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, almost a specified number of game balls enter the second large winning hole 128.

When a game ball enters the second large winning hole 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. As a result, in the most dominant state, the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of the number of all prize balls to the number of firing balls, is 100:120, and by simply continuing to fire the game balls toward the second game area 116b, the game ball can be increased.

In addition, in this most dominant state, the normal game state has become a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 120b is almost never in the open state. In addition, in the most advantageous state, the special gaming state is a high probability game state, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the most advantageous state is about 1/105.7, so in the most advantageous state, the next It can be said that winning the jackpot is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 reservation of the real variable object in this most dominant state, when a jackpot is won, special symbols F to J are determined as jackpot symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the gaming state after the big prize game becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state. Further, when the special symbols H and J are determined, 4 or 10 round games are executed in the big prize game, and the game state after the big prize game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most advantageous state has an extremely high degree of advantage compared to other gaming states, the main purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the gaming state to the most advantageous state. As mentioned above, the game is first started in the normal state, but the normal state does not shift to the most advantageous state all at once. Therefore, the transition route of transitioning to the most dominant state via the high probability precursor state is the transition route to the most dominant state in gaming machine 100.

Furthermore, in the simultaneous spin reference example, aside from the time-saving feature escaping in the high probability premonition state, the condition for transitioning from the high probability premonition state to the most advantageous state is set to be the winning of a specific small win symbol. Specifically, when a small win is won by the special 1 reserve, which is the actual variable subject in the high probability premonition state, the small win symbol is determined to be special symbol Z1 with a probability of 1%, special symbol Z2 with a probability of 69%, and special symbol Z3 with a probability of 30% (see Figure 8 (c)).

At this time, when the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small winning symbol, the time saving game state ends with the end of the small winning game, and as a result, the gaming state shifts to the most advantageous state.

In this way, since the player moves to the most advantageous state upon winning a specific small win, the player is This always creates a sense of anticipation and tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high probability precursor state, high probability time saving state, and low probability time saving state, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/3.45. Therefore, even in the high probability precursor state, the high probability time saving state, and the low probability time saving state, small winning games are frequently executed as in the most advantageous state. However, in the high probability precursor state, the high probability time saving state, and the low probability time saving state, the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state. Further, as will be described in detail later, the normal game state is maintained in the time-saving game state even during the small winning game. Therefore, although the second large prize opening 128 is opened during the small winning game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable start port 120B is located above the second large winning port 128, and in the time-saving game state, the opening time of the first variable start port 120B is much longer than the opening time of the second large winning port 128. Therefore, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, most of the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b enter the first variable start port 120B, and almost no game balls enter the second large winning port 128. As a result, in the high probability premonition state, high probability time-saving state, and low probability time-saving state, unlike the most advantageous state, the game balls will gradually decrease even if a right hit is made during play.

As mentioned above, when the game progresses with the real variable object in accordance with the original gameplay, if you win a jackpot, the gaming state after the big winning game will be a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a high probability premonitory state. Set to either. The high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability portent state have in common that the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state. On the other hand, the high-accuracy time-saving state continues until the next jackpot is won, whereas the high-accuracy precursor state is when the game is stopped by winning a specific small win (special symbol Z1) or exiting the time-saving state. The difference is that the state is shifted to the most dominant state.

In addition, in the high accuracy time saving state, the fluctuation time for small hits and losses is set to 1 second, whereas in the high accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time for small wins and losses is set to 3 to 10 seconds. The difference is that it is set within the range (see FIG. 10(b)). That is, the average of the fluctuation times in the high certainty time saving state is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time in the high certainty precursor state.

Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, since the fluctuation time at the time of a small win and a loss is relatively short, it is possible to digest the actual fluctuation targets at a high speed until winning the jackpot. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, during the special symbol variation time, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner on the sub-control board 330. In the highly accurate time saving state, the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c also becomes relatively short. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, as long as the special 1 reservation continues to be memorized, the special 1 reservation (fluctuating display of production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c) will continue to be consumed at a high speed, and the time until winning the jackpot will be reduced. This allows the player to play the game until the next jackpot without feeling (reduced) stress.

On the other hand, in the highly accurate precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of a small hit and a loss is relatively long, but the sub-control board 330 performs an effect as to whether or not the state will shift to the most advantageous state. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the state will shift to the most advantageous state.

In this way, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, even if you win a specific small hit (special symbol Z1), it will not shift to the most advantageous state, but by setting the average fluctuation time short, the next big hit It is possible to shorten the time it takes to win a game and reduce stress on the player. In addition, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the average fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-accuracy time-saving state, but the fluctuation time can be used to determine whether or not to move to the most advantageous state, and the game This can give people a sense of anticipation and tension.

As described above, there are a high-probability time-saving state and a high-probability portent state in which the special game state is a high-probability game state and the normal game state is a time-saving game state, and changes in the high-probability time-saving state are provided. By making the average time shorter than the average fluctuating time of the high-predictability precursor state, new gaming features can be provided.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the game state when the game is not played properly according to the simultaneous play reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160 and the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display 162 are performed simultaneously and in parallel. At this time, in the case where there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged as a result of a big winning lottery being held due to suspension of items other than those subject to actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big winning lottery is held due to reservations other than the actual fluctuation targets, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, a jackpot due to reservations other than the actual fluctuation targets may be confirmed. In this case, the gaming state will change as shown in FIG. 17.

Below, the main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-mentioned gaming properties will be explained.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine status flag according to a reference example of simultaneous play. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game can be played is managed by a gaming machine status flag. The gaming machine status flag is set to one of six flag values from 00H to 05H. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 00H indicates a gaming enabled state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the progress of the game is controlled, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is stopped. will be stopped.

The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=01H indicates a setting change state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates the setting confirmation status, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, etc. It becomes possible to confirm. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=03H indicates an abnormal setting state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the registered setting value is considered abnormal and the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=05H indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing according to the gaming machine status flag is performed.

(CPU Initialization Processing of Main Control Board 300)
FIG. 19 is a first flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 20 is a second flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the main CPU 300a is powered on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process and performs setting processes necessary to execute various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a wait processing time in a timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. Note that the main control board 300 is provided with a power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, a power-off warning signal is output from the power-off detection circuit. If a power cutoff notice signal is detected, the process moves to step S100-3, and if a power cutoff notice signal is not detected, the process moves to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the wait time set in step S100-3 above has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process moves to step S100-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
Main CPU 300a executes necessary processing to permit access to main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag before the power is turned off into the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was turned off (is normal) and whether the backup flag is normal. If it is determined that the backup flag and the checksum are normal, the process proceeds to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either one or both are not normal, the process proceeds to step S100-25.

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include a setting value or a gaming machine status flag as the first address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button is pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal is input, the process moves to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal is not input, the process moves to step S100-19. .

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a checks whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (playable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, if it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-21, and if it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 02H (setting confirmation status). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state where the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the gaming machine enters the setting confirmation status.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the area of the main RAM 300c after the start address set in step S100-15, which is to be cleared when the power is restored, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an out-of-area read/write check process that checks and clears the read/write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including the setting value and the gaming machine status flag to the top address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read/write memory in step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined that it is normal, the process moves to step S100-37, and if it is determined that it is not normal, the process moves to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and moves the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, if it is determined that 02H is set, the process moves to step S100-39, and if it is determined that 02H is not set, the process moves to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets the D register to 00H (playable state).

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change conditions are satisfied. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-43, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-45. Here, the setting change conditions include at least that the setting change switch 180s is on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register to the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the items to be cleared when clearing the RAM in the main RAM 300c, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for transmitting a payout command (RAM clear designation command) (stores the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable status). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process moves to step S110, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process moves to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group setting processing. Note that this subcommand group set processing will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt period.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to prohibit interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. In addition, the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number is for determining the initial value and end value of the winning pattern random number. In other words, when the winning pattern random number goes through one round from the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number to -1 the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number by the updating process of the winning pattern random number described later, the winning pattern random number at that time It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310, and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for transmitting sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. Note that, hereinafter, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number for determining the change presentation pattern are collectively referred to as the change presentation random number.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating subcommand group setting processing (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous execution reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process to set a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value designation command setting process of setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special figure 1 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 1 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special figure 2 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 2 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number command setting process to set a number command indicating the remaining number of times in the time saving gaming state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process that sets a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating a variation pattern selection state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase designation command setting process that sets a special figure phase designation command indicating a special game management phase in the transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is in a special symbol change waiting state. As a result, if it is determined that it is in the special symbol change waiting state, the process moves to step S110-21, and if it is determined that it is not in the special symbol change waiting state, the subcommand group set process is ended.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the sub-command group setting process.

Next, we will explain the interrupt processing in the main control board 300. Here, we will explain the power-off evacuation processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing.

(Evacuation processing at power-off of main control board 300 (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the power-off saving process (XINT interrupt process) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power-off save process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the registers.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has been detected, the process moves to step S300-11, and if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S300-7. .

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts, and ends the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes checksum setting processing to calculate and save a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes RAM protect setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined number of times the power outage detection signal has been detected to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power outage occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power cutoff notice signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off notice signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has been detected, the process moves to step S300-17, and if it is determined that a power-off notice signal has not been detected, the process moves to step S300-23. .

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17 above.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process moves to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process moves to the above-described CPU initialization process (step S100).

Note that if the power is actually cut off, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is stopped while the steps S300-17 to S300-25 are looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous running reference example, hereinafter referred to as "4ms"). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol reservation display 164, and the second special symbol reservation. Dynamic port output processing is executed to control the lighting of the display 166, normal symbol display 168, normal symbol pending display 170, right hit notification display 172, and performance display monitor 184.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes a port input process to accurately obtain the latest switch states.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process moves to step S400-15, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 above is equal to or greater than 03H (setting abnormal state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process moves to step S400-27, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process moves to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes setting-related processing and moves the processing to step S400-27. Note that the setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs timer update processing to update various timer counters. Here, unless otherwise specified, the various timer counters are decremented each time the main control board 300 processes a timer interrupt, and when they reach 0, they stop decrementing.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes the process of updating the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number, as in step S100-61 above.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is incremented by 1 and updated, and if the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter has completed one cycle, the current Update the random number from the initial value update random number for winning symbol random number.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number use hardware random numbers that are updated by a hardware random number generation section built into the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number according to certain rules, automatically changes the random number sequence every time the random number sequence goes around, and updates the starting value every time the system is reset. It is changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed starting opening detection switch 120As, a first variable starting opening detection switch 120Bs, a second starting opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a regular figure operation opening detection switch 125s, and a first big winning opening detection switch. 126s, a switch management process is executed to determine whether or not a signal is input from the second big winning opening detection switch 128s. Note that details of this switch management processing will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes special game management processing for controlling the progress of the above-mentioned special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the above-mentioned normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an error management process for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first big winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second big winning opening detection switch 128s, and detects the corresponding The prize opening switch process is executed to increment the counter etc. for prize ball control.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23 above.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol pending display 164, a second special symbol pending display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol pending display 170. , executes an LED display setting process in which display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed hit notification display 172 is set in the output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c, and the second big winning hole solenoid 128c, and executes a solenoid output image synthesis process for storing the synthesized image in the output port buffer. .

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes port output processing for outputting the common output buffer value stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to prohibit interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating a base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and to common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184. Execute performance display monitor control processing to set in the output buffer. Note that in the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated every predetermined period. Here, the base ratio of the current period and the base ratio of the previous period may be switched and displayed on the performance display monitor 184 at predetermined time intervals. Further, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched in accordance with a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a restores the registers and ends the timer interrupt process.

Figure 24 is a flowchart explaining the setting-related process (S450) for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). If it is judged to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-3, and if it is judged not to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values stored in the setting value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal is input). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed, the process moves to step S450-7, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is not pressed, the process moves to step S450-9. .

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting value of the processing area is in the range of 1 to 6. If it is judged that the setting value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and if it is judged that the setting value is not in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area in the setting value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related process is ended, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process moves to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a settings-related end designation command indicating the end of the settings-related process in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process shown in FIG. That is, when the setting-related process is executed, at the end, the model command, setting value specification command, special figure 1 hold specification command, special figure 2 hold specification command, number of times command, variation pattern selection state specification command, special figure phase A designation command and a customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (playable state) and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the CPU initializes. In the processing (FIG. 19), 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag. After that, the timer interrupt process is executed, but since the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change status), all processes related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in FIG. 23) are executed. ) is stopped and configuration-related processing is executed.

The setting-related process is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related process, a press operation of the RAM clear button is accepted as a setting change operation of the registered setting value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) that accepts a setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is set to one of the setting values in multiple stages according to the setting change operation. can be switched to

Then, when the setting change switch 180s is turned off while the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change process ends and the gaming machine status flag is set to 00H (playable status). Set. As a result, processing related to the progress of the game can be executed from the next timer interrupt processing.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, after the RAM clear button press operation, that is, the reception of the setting change operation of the registered setting value, is completed, the setting value corresponding to the registered setting value is specified in the subcommand group set processing. The command is sent to sub control board 330. On the other hand, while a setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent to the sub control board 330. In this way, the setting value specification command is not sent while the setting change operation is being accepted, but the setting value specification command is sent when the setting change operation is finished accepting and the game can proceed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk that registered setting values are obtained illegally.

In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, multiple flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), setting-related processing can be executed, and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, setting value designation commands are not sent while the game is in progress, and the risk of registered setting values being obtained illegally is reduced.

Next, among the timer interrupt processes described above, the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, and the normal game management process in step S700 will be explained in detail.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous operation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is being turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s has been turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process moves to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passage process based on passage of the game ball to the gate 124. Note that details of this gate passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal game operating port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the normal game operating port 125 and the detection signal from the normal game operating port detection switch 125s is turned on. . As a result, if it is determined that it is the time when the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is turned on, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is not turned on, the process goes to step S500-5. move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the normal figure operating port 125.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first fixed start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first fixed start hole 120A and a detection signal has been input from the first fixed start hole detection switch 120As. If it is judged that the first fixed start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is judged that the first fixed start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes a first start hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed start hole 120A. The first start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first variable start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first variable start hole 120B and a detection signal has been input from the first variable start hole detection switch 120Bs. If it is determined that the first variable start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-9.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes a first start hole passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first variable start hole 120B. The first start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second starting port detection switch is on-detection, that is, whether a game ball enters the second starting port 122 and a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is on, the process moves to step S530, and if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is not on, the process moves to step S500-11. move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the game ball entering the second starting port 122. Note that details of this second starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the big winning opening detection switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 126 or the second big winning opening 128 and the first big winning opening detection switch 126s or the second big winning opening detection switch is turned on. It is determined whether a detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is on, the process moves to step S540, and if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is not on, the switch management process is ended.

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has entered properly into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, and when it is determined that the game ball has entered properly. In this step, a grand prize opening passage process is executed to transmit a grand prize opening entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first grand prize opening 126 or the second grand prize opening 128 to the sub-control board 330. The details of this big prize opening passage process will be described later.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating the gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than 4. If it is judged that the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and if it is judged that the normal pattern reserved ball counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section in which the acquired winning determination random number is to be saved among the four storage sections of the normal pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in the above step S510-1 in the target storage section calculated in the above step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a general pattern reservation designation command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area, and ends the gate passing process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating the first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. In addition, the special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the reservation type is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation. 01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process, and ends the first starting opening passage process. Note that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second starting port passing process (step S530). Therefore, details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be explained after explaining the second starting opening passage process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process to be described later, and ends the second starting opening passage process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the first starting opening passage process (step S520) and the second starting opening passage process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of reserved balls for the target special symbol. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 1, i.e., the reserved number for special 1, is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 2, i.e., the reserved number for special 2, is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. As a result, if it is determined that it is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated, and if it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process moves to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section in which the acquired jackpot determination random number is to be saved among the storage sections of the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5 above, the winning symbol random number updated in step S400-13 above, and the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step S100-69 above, and executes the random number in step S535-11 above. Store it in the target storage unit calculated in .

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special reserved command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 1) of the special reserved ball number counter, and the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 2) of the special reserved ball number counter. As a result, the special reserved number of special 1 and the special reserved number of special 2 are transmitted to the sub-control board 330 every time the special reserved number of special 1 or special reserved number of special 2 is stored.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the result of the major lottery, the fluctuation pattern number, etc. are tentatively determined, and a prefetch designation command according to the result of the tentative determination is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. This performance determination process at the time of acquisition will be explained using FIG. 30.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition performance determination process (step S536) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game state is a high probability game state or a low probability game state. Specifically, if the game is in a low-probability gaming state, the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 6) is selected; if the high-probability gaming state is, the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 7) is selected. ). Then, based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target storage section in step S535-13, special symbol hit provisional determination processing is performed to provisionally determine whether it is a jackpot, a small win, or a loss.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol temporary determination process for temporarily determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the provisional major lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process) is a jackpot or small win, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Load the winning pattern random number, winning type (big win or small win), and pending type, select the corresponding winning pattern random number judgment table (see Figure 8), and extract the special pattern judgment data. Save the special symbol judgment data (type of jackpot symbol or small prize symbol). Further, if the result of the tentative major lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, special symbol determination data for loss (type of loss symbol) corresponding to the reservation type is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a selects a fluctuation pattern random number determination table according to the special symbol probability state flag, the pending type, the number of fluctuations in the game state, and the special symbol determination data (special symbol type) extracted in step S536-3 above. , set the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines a variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S536-7 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead specified variable pattern command (look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the variable pattern number provisionally determined in step S536-9 above, and terminates the performance determination process at the time of acquisition.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening passage process (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S540-1)
If the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that the big winning opening detection switch is turned on, it loads the special game management phase. Although details will be described later, the special game management phase indicates the stage of the special game execution process, that is, the progress status of the special game, and is updated according to the stage of the special game execution process.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase loaded in the above step S540-1 indicates a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher. The special game management phase has nine stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H correspond to the stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher. Since the large prize game or the small prize game is executed when the special game management phase is 01H to 08H, it is judged here whether the large prize game or the small prize game is currently being played. If it is judged that the special game management phase indicates a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher, the process proceeds to step S540-5, and if it is judged that the special game management phase does not indicate a stage of execution processing of the large prize opening pre-processing or higher, the process proceeds to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a large prize opening ball entry command, indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128, in the transmission buffer, and ends the large prize opening passage process.

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a determines that the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 is inappropriate, executes a predetermined error process, and ends the big winning hole passing process.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the special game management phase according to the simultaneous play reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, there is a special game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, and a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball into the gate 124 or the normal pattern operating port. A normal game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball 125 proceeds simultaneously and in parallel. The processing related to the special game is executed stepwise and repeatedly, but the main control board 300 manages each process related to the special game in a special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for controlling the execution of special games, and a special game management phase is associated with each of these special game control modules. . Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "special symbol variation processing" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H" In this case, a module for executing the "big winning opening pre-opening process" is called, and if the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H", the "great winning opening opening control process" is executed. If the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H", the module for executing the "big winning opening closing effective process" is called, and the special game management phase is "04H". ” or “08H”, a module for executing “big winning opening end wait processing” is called.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous play reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1 above.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 above to start processing.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

Figure 34 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous spin reference example. This special symbol variation process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol change waiting process, which will be described later with reference to Figures 35 to 38.

(Step S620)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol variation processing. This special symbol variation process will be described later using FIG. 40.

(Step S630)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol stop symbol display process. This special symbol stop symbol display process will be described later using FIG. 41.

FIG. 35 is a first flowchart illustrating the special symbol change waiting process (step S610) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. It is a 2nd flowchart explaining symbol change waiting processing (step S610).

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the suspended flag is on. Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, small winning symbols may be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner on the first special symbol display 160. In this case, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a small winning game is executed, but during this time, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is interrupted. After the end of the small winning game, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160 is restarted. The suspended flag is turned on when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 and the first special symbol display 160 is in the process of displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner. Here, if it is determined that the suspending flag is on, the process moves to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the suspending flag is not on, the process moves to step S610-5.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for resuming the varying display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, and transfers the processing to step S610-51 in FIG.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special 1 pending number is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the special 1 pending number is 1 or more, the process moves to step S610-7, and if it is determined that the special 1 pending number is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S610-51. .

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first special symbol display 160 is displaying a variable pattern based on the special 1 reserved symbol, or whether the symbol based on the special 1 reserved symbol is displaying a stopped symbol (counting the stop display time). If it is judged that the variable pattern is being displayed or that the symbol is displaying a stopped symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-51, and if it is judged that the variable pattern is not being displayed and that the symbol is not displaying a stopped symbol, the process proceeds to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a blocks the special 1 reservation stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special figure reservation storage area to the storage section with the lowest ordinal number. Specifically, the special 1 pending stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the special 1 pending stored in the first storage section is block transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift processing, the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter corresponding to special 1 pending is subtracted by "1", and it is indicated that special 1 pending has been subtracted by "1". Set the pending reduction specification command to the send buffer.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if it is determined that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S610-17, and if it is determined that the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol winning determination process for performing a major lottery. This special symbol hit determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process to determine a special symbol. Here, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and reserved type transferred to the 0th memory unit are loaded, the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or small win symbol random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol) is saved. Also, if the result of the big role lottery in the step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for loss is saved. Then, after the special symbol determination data is saved, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S610-19, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S611.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the big win determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit is within the range of the small win. If it is judged to be within the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-21, and if it is judged to be outside the range of the small win, the process proceeds to step S610-23.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the transferred winning symbol random number and reservation type into the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small winning symbol random number determination table, extracts special symbol determination data, and extracts special symbol determination data (small (type of winning symbol).

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a saves special symbol determination data related to losing symbols, and sets a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a fluctuating symbol that will eventually stop displaying a jackpot symbol, the first special symbol display 160 will always display a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. Only the variable display of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed will be performed.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in the above steps S610-15, S610-21, and S610-23. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that will finally be lit up.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process that determines a variation pattern number. Details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-27)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-15 above and checks the type of jackpot symbol. do. Then, with reference to the gaming state setting table and the current gaming state, the gaming state, high accuracy number, and time saving number to be set after the end of the big prize game are determined, and the determination results are used as the special symbol probability state preliminary flag and the time saving state preliminary flag. It is saved in the flag, high-accuracy number-cutting reserve counter, and time-saving number-cutting reserve counter. In addition, if the losing symbol is saved, the process moves to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in order to start variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160. A counter value is associated with each of the 7 segments constituting the first special symbol display 160, and the lighting control of the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is performed. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter includes a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162, which are separately provided. Here, a counter value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes the number-of-times management process. Here, processing is performed to end the time saving gaming state according to the number of fluctuations. This number-of-times management process will be described later.

(Step S610-35)
The main CPU 300a sets a number command indicating the remaining number of times (actual remaining number of times) until the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-37)
The main CPU 300a sets a gaming state change designation command indicating the gaming state at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-51)
As shown in FIG. 36, the main CPU 300a determines whether the special 2 pending number is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the special 2 pending number is 1 or more, the process moves to step S610-53, and if it is determined that the special 2 pending number is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S610-85. .

(Step S610-53)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a variable pattern based on the special 2 reservation, or whether the symbol based on the special 2 reservation is displaying a stopped pattern (counting the stop display time). If it is judged that the variable pattern is being displayed or the stopped pattern is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-85, and if it is judged that the variable pattern is not being displayed and the stopped pattern is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S610-55.

(Step S610-55)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the special 2 reservations stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure reservation storage area to the storage section with the next lower ordinal number. Specifically, the special 2 reservations stored in the second to fourth storage units are transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the special 2 pending stored in the first storage section is block transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter corresponding to special 2 reservation is subtracted by "1", and it is indicated that special 2 reservation has been subtracted by "1". Set the pending reduction specification command to the send buffer.

(Step S610-57)
The main CPU 300a determines whether symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 160. As a result, if it is determined that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S610-63, and if it is determined that the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether it is a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and reads the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table. A special symbol winning determination process is executed in which a winning lottery is selected, a major prize lottery is performed, and the lottery results are stored.

(Step S610-61)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the major lottery in step S611 is a jackpot or a small win, the winning symbol random number and reservation type transferred to the 0th storage section are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or small winning symbol is loaded. Select the random number determination table, extract special symbol determination data, and save the extracted special symbol determination data (type of jackpot symbol). Moreover, when the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a loss, special symbol determination data for a loss is saved. Then, after saving the special symbol determination data, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-63)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S610-65, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S611.

(Step S610-65)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit is within the range of a small win. As a result, if it is determined that it is within the range of a small win, the process moves to step S610-67, and if it is determined that it is outside the range of a small win, the process moves to step S610-69.

(Step S610-67)
The main CPU 300a loads the transferred winning symbol random number and reservation type into the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small winning symbol random number determination table, extracts special symbol determination data, and extracts special symbol determination data (small (type of winning symbol).

(Step S610-69)
The main CPU 300a saves special symbol determination data related to losing symbols, and sets a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the first special symbol display 160 is displaying a fluctuating symbol that will eventually stop displaying a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol display 162 will always display a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. Only the variable display of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed will be performed.

(Step S610-71)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stopping symbol numbers corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in the above steps S610-61, S610-67, and S610-69.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process that determines a variation pattern number. Details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-73)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-75)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data saved in steps S610-61 and selects the jackpot symbol. Check the type. Then, with reference to the gaming state setting table and the current gaming state, the gaming state, high accuracy number, and time saving number to be set after the end of the big prize game are determined, and the determination results are used as the special symbol probability state preliminary flag and the time saving state preliminary flag. It is saved in the flag, high-accuracy number-cutting reserve counter, and time-saving number-cutting reserve counter. In addition, if the losing symbol is saved, the process moves to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-77)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting the special symbol display symbol counter in order to start the variable display of symbols in the second special symbol display 162. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segment display that constitutes the second special symbol display 162, and lighting of the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment that is turned on at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number-of-times management process, which will be described later.

(Step S610-81)
The main CPU 300a sets a number command indicating the counter value updated in step S610-79 (remaining number of times until the high probability number becomes 0) in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-83)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Step S610-85)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined customer waiting process when the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are not displaying symbols fluctuating or stopping, and wait for the special symbol to change. Finish the process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol hit determination process (S611) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registered setting value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, if it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-11, and if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 03H (setting abnormal state).

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (sub-command) in the transmission buffer and ends the special symbol winning determination process. When this setting abnormal state command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, a notification that a setting abnormality has occurred is issued.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the jackpot determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower limit value and upper limit value for determining a jackpot or small win, respectively.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (major lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot or small win has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 as determination information, and ends the special symbol hit determination process.

Figure 38 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern variable number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 for the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the currently set gaming state and determines whether the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S612-7, and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S612-5.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation pattern random number determination table selection process that selects and sets a corresponding variation pattern random number determination table based on the current gaming state, pending type, and determined special symbol type.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a increments the total variation counter. The total number of fluctuations counter is calculated based on the number of times the symbols are displayed in fluctuations on the first special symbol display 160 (the first number of fluctuations) and the number of symbols on the second special symbol display 162 after the time-saving gaming state is set. The total number of fluctuations is counted by adding up the number of times of fluctuation display (second number of fluctuations). This total number of fluctuations is updated by 1 each time the symbol fluctuation display is started in the time-saving gaming state.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether it is time to start the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if it is determined that it is time to start the fluctuating display of symbols on the second special symbol display 162, the process moves to step S612-11, and when the fluctuating display of symbols on the second special symbol display 162 starts. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process moves to step S612-5.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the first special symbol display 160 starts displaying variations in symbols, the variation pattern random number determination table is selected based on the total number of variations updated in step S612-7. The Rukoto.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a increments the second variation counter. In addition, the second variation number counter counts the number of times the symbol is varied and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 (second variation number) after the time-saving gaming state is set. This second number of fluctuations is updated by 1 each time the variable display of symbols is started on the second special symbol display 162 when the time-saving gaming state is set.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second variation number updated in step S612-11 is 4 or less. As a result, if it is determined that it is 4 or less, the process moves to step S612-15, and if it is determined that it is not 4 or less, the process moves to step S612-5.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the variable display of symbols starts on the second special symbol display 162 and the second number of variations is 5 or more, the total number of variations updated in the above step S612-7 Based on this, a variation pattern random number determination table is selected. According to Table I selected at this time, the variable time is definitely determined to be 10 minutes.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a special table as a variation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a, based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table set in step S612-5 or step S612-15 and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 or step S610-55, Determine the fluctuation pattern number.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in the above step S612-17 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special pattern variation number determination process.

Figure 39 is a flowchart explaining the cutoff number management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of time reductions, that is, the counter value of the time reduction number cut-off counter is greater than zero. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is greater than 0, the process moves to step S613-3, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the number of time reduction management processing is ended.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time-saving cut counter.

(Step S613-5)
In the above step S613-3, the main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value (time-saving count) has been updated to 0. As a result, if it is judged that the time-saving count is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-7, and if it is judged that the time-saving count is not 0, the process for managing the number of times the game has been cut is terminated.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a time-saving state flag in order to set the normal gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, after the normal gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state at the start of fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the number of time-savings (in this case, 50 or 100 times). The Rukoto. For example, if the state is set to a high probability precursor state, it will be set to the most dominant state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time-saving end flag and ends the number-of-times-cut management process.

Figure 40 is a flowchart explaining the processing during special pattern change on the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value. The processing target identification value is used to identify whether to execute the process related to special 1 suspension or the process related to special 2 suspension when executing each of the following processes, If "00H" is set as the processing target identification value, processing related to Special 1 pending is executed, and if "01H" is set as the processing target identification value, processing related to Special 2 pending is executed. is executed. In addition, the various counters and timers that appear in the explanation of the special symbol fluctuation process and the special symbol stop symbol display process are provided with special 1 hold and special 2 hold, and the following steps S620-5~ The process in step S620-23 is performed on the processing target (counter, timer, etc.) corresponding to the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the pending processing target is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if the variable display is in progress, the process moves to step S620-5, and if the variable display is not in progress, the process moves to step S620-25.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a executes processing to update the special symbol variation base counter. Note that the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is set so that it makes one round at a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, The counter value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-5 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process moves to step S620-9, and if the counter value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-13.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol fluctuation timer update process that subtracts a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer set in step S610-27 or step S610-73.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer updated in step S620-9 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S620-19, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-13.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each of the 7-segment segments that make up the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162. Specifically, if the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and if the timer value is "1" or greater, the timer value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current timer value.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-17, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-25.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and moves the process to step S620-25. As a result, each segment constituting the 7 segments is sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-25 or S610-71 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol fluctuation stop time, which is a time during which special symbols are stopped and displayed, in a special game timer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, if it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the special symbol variation process is ended, and if it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the process moves to step S620-27.

(Step S620-27)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the processing target identification value, and moves the process to step S620-3.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special symbol related to the reserved type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. If it is judged that the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-5, and if it is judged that the special symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-23 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process moves to step S630-37, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S630 -7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the results of the major lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the major lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that the game is a loss, the process moves to step S630-29, and if it is determined that the game is not a loss, the process moves to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process is transferred to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a pattern forced stop process. This pattern forced stop processing will be described later using FIG. 42.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process to update the game state. Here, when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the game state is set to the initial state, and when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the process directly moves to the next process.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets data in the special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the determined type of special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessory maximum activation count setting process. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-15 above, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter. . In addition, this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big prize game that will start from now. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big winning game, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big prize game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" when starting a big prize game, and updates the special game management phase to "05H" when starting a small winning game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase updated in step S630-23 is "01H", that is, whether it is a jackpot. As a result, if it is determined that the special game management phase is "01H", the process moves to step S630-27, and if it is determined that the special game management phase is not "01H", the process goes to step S630-29. Transfer processing.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. Through this process, a jackpot signal will be output with the start of the big prize game (opening). Although a plurality of signals are provided to be output from the game information output terminal board 312, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be explained here.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state confirmation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time-saving end flag is on. As described above, the time-saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 39 at the start of the fluctuation when changing from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state. That is, the time-saving end flag is turned on here when the normal game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state due to the time-saving exit at the start of the 50th or 100th fluctuation in the high probability premonition state. That is, here, the time-saving end flag is judged to be on only when the fluctuation at the time of the time-saving exit ends. If it is judged that the time-saving end flag is on, the process moves to step S630-33, and if it is judged that the time-saving end flag is not on, the process moves to step S630-37.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, the jackpot signal will be output during the big prize game or during the time saving game state.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time-saving end flag.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). If it is judged that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the process for displaying the special symbol stop symbols is terminated, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the process proceeds to step S630-39.

(Step S630-39)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing target identification value and moves the process to step S630-3.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the pattern forced stop processing (step S631) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a small winning symbol, the process moves to step S631-3, and if it is determined that it is not a small winning symbol, the process moves to step S631-11.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value is 00H, that is, whether the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. If it is judged that the processing target identification value is 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-11, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-5.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the (other) special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S631-11, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S631-7.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the suspending flag.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation interruption process for interrupting the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, and ends the symbol forced stop process. Here, the main CPU 300a executes a process for temporarily saving the remaining time of the variable time and information related to the special symbols in a predetermined storage area.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of forcing the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, on which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, to forcibly stop losing symbols, and ends the symbol forced stop processing.

As a result of the above processing, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, if the jackpot symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the first special symbol is displayed. A losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the device 160. On the other hand, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, if a small winning symbol or a losing symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, 1 The variable display on the special symbol display 160 will be temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big prize opening pre-opening process is executed when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S630-19 and the like is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the corresponding big prize opening pre-opening process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", The process moves to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a big winning opening designation command for transmitting the opening start of the big winning opening (start of the round game) to the sub control board 330.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes the big winning opening opening/closing switching process. This big winning hole opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("02H" or "06H"), and ends the special winning opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching number counter is the upper limit of the number of special electric accessory opening/closing switching (the number of opening/closing of the big prize opening during one round game). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the corresponding big winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the special electric device operation RAM set table and extracts solenoid control data for controlling the energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c and the second large prize opening solenoid 128c, and timer data which is the energization time or de-energization time, based on the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count counter.

(Step S641-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energizing the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S641-3, or controls the main CPU 300a to start energizing the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c, or to stop the energization. Execute the prize opening solenoid energization control process. By executing this big winning hole solenoid energization control process, in step S400-23 and step S400-25, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is controlled to start or stop energizing. That will happen.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 above in the special game timer. Incidentally, the timer value saved in the special game timer here becomes the maximum opening time of the big prize opening for one time.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is in the energization start state, that is, in step S641-5, the first big winning hole solenoid 126c or the second big winning hole solenoid 128c is activated. It is determined whether control processing to start energization has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the current is in the energization start state, the process moves to step S641-11, and if it is determined that the energization is not in the energization start state, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the big winning opening opening/closing switching process.

Figure 45 is a flowchart explaining the special prize opening control process in the main control board 300 in the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special prize opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S641-7 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S650-5, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S650-3.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S650-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S641.

(Step S641)
In step S650-3 above, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit of the number of switching times of special electric accessory opening/closing, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S641 above. do.

(Step S650-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the large prize opening winning ball counter updated in the above step S500-9 has reached a specified number, that is, whether the number of game balls equal to the maximum number of winning balls in one round has entered the large prize opening. If it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the large prize opening opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a large prize opening closing process required to close the large prize opening by stopping the energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c. As a result, the large prize opening becomes closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the big winning opening closing effective time (interval time) in a special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("03H" or "07H").

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a big winning opening closing designation command indicating that the big winning opening is closed in the transmission buffer, and ends the big winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big winning opening closing effective process is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S650-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the corresponding big winning opening closing valid processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step The process moves to S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter, that is, whether the preset number of round games has been completed. . As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous activation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum activation number counter, the process moves to step S660-9, and if it is determined that they do not match, the process moves to step S660-9. Then, the process moves to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H". In addition, when the special game management phase is 07H, that is, while the small winning game is being controlled, the number of rounds of the small winning game is "1", so the above step S660-3 is always determined as YES, Processing does not proceed to that step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the predetermined grand prize opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the big winning opening closing valid processing. As a result, the next round game will start.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process to save the ending time in a special game timer.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H").

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the big winning opening closing validating process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This big winning opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the corresponding big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", The process moves to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small winning game has ended. As a result, if it is determined that the special game management phase is "08H", the process moves to step S670-11, and if it is determined that the special game management phase is not "08H", the process goes to step S670-5. move.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting the gaming state after the end of the big prize game. Here, the gaming state, high accuracy number, and time saving number set in the preliminary area in step S610-29 or step S610-75 are loaded, and each flag is set and a counter value is set as the gaming state after the big winning game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal gaming state is set to the non-time-saving gaming state in step S670-5. As a result, if it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is set, the process moves to step S670-9, and if it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is not set, the process moves to step S670-21.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the most advantageous state is set after the big prize game, the output of the jackpot signal is stopped at the end of the big prize game.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the current game state is a high probability premonition state (high probability game state and time-saving game state). If it is judged to be a high probability premonition state, the process proceeds to step S670-13, and if it is judged not to be a high probability premonition state, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed is the special symbol Z1. As a result, if it is determined that it is the special symbol Z1, the process moves to step S670-15, and if it is determined that it is not the special symbol Z1, the process moves to step S670-21.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a time-saving state flag in order to change the normal gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in a high probability precursor state, the gaming state will be changed to the most advantageous state at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process to reset the time saving number counter.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a performs jackpot signal output stop processing to stop the jackpot signal being output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the small winning game is set to the most dominant state after the small winning game, the output of the jackpot signal is stopped at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a gaming state change designation command for transmitting the gaming state set after the end of the big winning game.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a sets number commands corresponding to the high accuracy number and time saving number in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, if special 1 hold or special 2 hold is stored, the fluctuating display of symbols will be restarted.

Figure 48 is a diagram explaining the normal game management phase in the simultaneous play reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous play reference example, the processing related to the normal game, which is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball into the normal play opening 125, is executed step by step and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to such normal games by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling the execution of normal games, and a normal game management phase is associated with each of these normal game control modules. . Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", A module for executing "normal symbol fluctuation processing" is called, and if the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display processing" is called, When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", the "normal When the module for executing the "Electric accessory prize opening control process" is called, and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "Ordinary electric accessory prize opening opening control process" is called. is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the normal game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous play reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1 above.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 above to start processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the control time of the normal game.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol pending ball counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol pending is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is ended, and if it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the normal pattern reservations (winning determination random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage section with one ordinal number smaller. Specifically, the ordinary map reservations stored in the second to fourth storage units are transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and transfers the general map reservation stored in the first storage section to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this normal symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is subtracted by "1", and a regular symbol pending reduction designation command indicating that the regular symbol pending has been subtracted by "1" is transmitted. Set in buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, performs a regular symbol lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute judgment processing.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the regular symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the regular symbol lottery in step S710-5. In addition, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a win, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. let The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 will finally be lit. For example, in the case of winning, the normal symbol stop symbol number will be "0". is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current gaming state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol fluctuation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol fluctuation time based on the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage section in step S710-3 and the normal symbol fluctuation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 above in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in order to start variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 168. For example, if the counter value of this normal symbol display symbol counter is set to "0", the normal symbol display 168 is controlled to light up, and if the counter value is set to "1", the normal symbol display is displayed. The lamp 168 is controlled to be turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set to the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in a transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the sending buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (winning symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Set to .

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol variation process is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S710-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates a normal symbol display timer that measures the lighting time and light-off time of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the timer value is set from the current timer value. Update the timer value to the value subtracted by "1".

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process moves to step S720-7, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the corresponding Normal symbol fluctuation processing ends.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value that indicates that the light of the normal symbol display 168 is off, it is updated to a counter value that indicates that the light of the symbol display 168 is lit, and the counter value that indicates that the symbol display 168 is lit is updated. If it is, the counter value is updated to indicate extinguishment, and the normal symbol fluctuation processing is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeats lighting and extinguishing (flashing) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol variation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in the above step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to turn on or off, and the result of the common symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern variation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal pattern, in a normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop designation command in the transmission buffer indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern has started.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal pattern variation processing.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S720-11 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", The process moves to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the general lottery.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the general drawing lottery is a win. As a result, if it is determined that it is a win, the process moves to step S730-9, and if it is determined that it is not a win (it is a loss), the process moves to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the normal game management process based on the first normal symbol pending is completed, and if the common symbol pending is stored, the process for starting the fluctuating display of the normal symbol based on the next pending is performed. becomes.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before normal power opening in the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening/closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S730-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening pre-opening process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process. This normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the processing before opening the normal electric device winning port.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B during one opening/closing control). Determine if there is. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and extracts solenoid control data (energization control data or energization stop control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 120c based on the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter, and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal electric closing effective time = pause time) of the normal electric role solenoid 120c.

(Step S741-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, or starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c. Executes physical solenoid energization control processing. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c is controlled to start or stop energizing in step S400-23 and step S400-25.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 above in the normal game timer. Note that the timer value saved in the normal game timer here becomes the maximum opening time of the first variable starting port 120B once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c has started energization, that is, whether the control process to start energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c has been performed in step S741-5. As a result, if it is determined that the current is in the energization start state, the process moves to step S741-11, and if it is determined that the energization is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory prize opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory prize opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S741-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process moves to step S750-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S750 -3.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit of the number of switching times of the normal electric accessory opening/closing. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process moves to step S750-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process moves to step S741.

(Step S741)
In step S750-3 above, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S741 above. do.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has reached the specified number, that is, whether the first variable starting port 120B is under one opening/closing control. It is determined whether the same number of game balls as the maximum possible winning number of balls have entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory prize opening control process is ended, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process moves to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric accessory closing process necessary to stop the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c and close the first variable starting port 120B. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is brought into a closed state.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power valid state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric accessory prize opening control process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory prize opening effective processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S750-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening closing valid processing is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening closing validating process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning hole end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory prize opening end wait process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". If so, the process moves to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, if the normal pattern is stored, the variable display of the normal pattern will be restarted. Next, as reference examples of performances, specific performances that can be executed in the above-mentioned type 1 gaming machines, type 2 gaming machines, and simultaneous spinning machines and specific processes related to the performances will be explained.

<Example of production reference>
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation performance of a non-reach variation pattern according to a production reference example. As described above, when the major prize lottery is performed on the main control board 300, a variable performance for notifying the results of the major prize lottery is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, that is, over the period of time when the special symbols are varied. In this variable performance, various background images are displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on this background image. Note that during the variable performance, along with the image displayed on the main performance display section 200a, sound is output from the audio output device 206, the performance lighting device 204 is controlled to be lit, and the performance accessory device 202 is turned on. Although the movement is controlled, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The variable performance according to the reference example of performance is broadly classified into a no-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the fluctuating performance of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are superimposed and variably displayed on this background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the winning lottery result is a loss. In this state, when a new special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, three production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 58(b). (scroll display). Note that the white arrow pointing downward in the figure indicates that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scrolled in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), first, the performance symbol 210a is stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), a performance symbol 210c different from the performance symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, at approximately the same timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the special symbol stops being displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, as shown in FIG. 58(e), , the performance symbols 210b are stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big prize lottery result based on the final stop display mode of the three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation production of a normal reach variation pattern according to a production reference example. In the performance reference example, reach variation patterns are broadly classified into normal reach variation patterns, developed reach variation patterns, and pseudo-continuous reach variation patterns. In the variation production of the normal reach variation pattern, similarly to the variation production of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation display of production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c starts with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and as shown in FIG. 59(a). As shown, the production pattern 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the same effect pattern 210c as the effect pattern 210a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the same performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode in which they are stopped and displayed in the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the performance symbols 210a and 210c are "Reach" is displayed superimposed on 210a and 210c. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of ready-to-reach modes, and the same performance symbols 210a and 210c with numbers "1" to "9" written on them are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(d), the variable display is continued with the shapes of the performance symbols 210a, 210c being different from before the ready-to-reach mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a and 210c is stopped and displayed, and the player is informed that the result of the big winning lottery was a loss.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuating performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss according to the performance reference example, and FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuating performance of the developed reach fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot according to the performance reference example. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to (d) and FIGS. 61(a) to (d), the variation effect of the developed reach variation pattern is similar to the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, in the main effect display section 200a, The effect patterns 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, and then a ready-to-reach development effect is executed in which a predetermined developed image (video) is played back and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60(e) and 61(e), a mission is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and also as shown in FIGS. 60(f), (g) and 61( As shown in f) and (g), images for accomplishing the mission are displayed.

Here, the development images for reach development effects are broadly divided into miss patterns and big win patterns, and in the development image for the miss pattern, as shown in FIG. 60(h), an image indicating failure of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a miss. On the other hand, in the development image for the big win pattern, as shown in FIG. 61(h), an image indicating success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 61(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a big win.

In addition, the reach development production includes, for example, as described above, a mission production in which a development image of the mission challenge is displayed, and a battle production in which a development image in which an ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is displayed. It is being The mission production includes a plurality of execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle production includes a plurality of execution patterns with different characters appearing and fighting methods. In addition, as mentioned above, the execution patterns of mission performances are broadly divided into the jackpot pattern where the mission is completed and the losing pattern where the mission fails, but the execution pattern of the battle performance is also similar. The game can be roughly divided into a jackpot pattern in which the player wins, and a loss pattern in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character.

The jackpot pattern and the loss pattern have the same contents until the final stage of the performance, and differ in terms of whether the ally character wins or loses, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. . Therefore, during the reach development performance, the player cannot identify the result of the big winning lottery until the end of the variable performance, and the player is given a sense of expectation of a jackpot.

Note that the jackpot pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot, and the losing pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss. However, in one fluctuating performance, the reach development performance may be executed twice. In this case, the first reach development performance is performed with a losing pattern, and the second reach development performance is performed with a losing pattern. Or run in a jackpot pattern. Below, the flow of performance when the reach development performance is executed twice in one fluctuating performance will be explained.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable performance when the reach development performance according to the performance reference example is executed twice. For example, suppose that after the performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, a mission performance is executed as shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but immediately after it is announced that the mission could not be achieved, as shown in FIG. 62(c). , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the main effect display section 200a displays a developed image for battle effects, and the second reach development effect is started. This developed image for battle production has the content of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and when a jackpot is won, the ally character ultimately wins against the enemy character and , as shown in FIG. 62(f), effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in combination to notify a jackpot. On the other hand, in the event of a loss, as shown in FIG. 62(g), the ally character is ultimately defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 62(h), the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c notify the loss. The combination will stop and display.

Figure 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pseudo-successive reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance according to the performance reference example. As shown in Figure 63 (a), when the display of the fluctuation of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c starts, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of multiple types of pseudo patterns that have been set up in advance, as shown in Figure 63 (b). In this pseudo pattern, for example, the same performance patterns 210a and 210b and the performance pattern 210c with a number "2" larger than the performance patterns 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo mode, the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is restarted, as shown in FIG. 63(c). In other words, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows a re-variable display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(e), when the variable display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is restarted, the production symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in a ready-to-reach mode, as shown in FIG. 63(f), Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 63(g) to (i), a reach development effect is executed in the same way as the developed reach fluctuation pattern, and the result of the big winning lottery is notified to the player.

In this way, the variation performance of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation production of the developed reach variation pattern until the production symbols 210a and 210c become the reach mode, and after reaching the reach mode, the variation production of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation production of the developed reach variation pattern. The variable performance will proceed in the same way as the reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation display patterns of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c until the reach state is reached are provided, and the number of tentative stop displays of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, in other words, the number of times that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed, differs for each fluctuation display pattern. This fluctuation display pattern is determined by the fluctuation mode command, and the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode command when the jackpot is won and when it is lost is set so that the more the number of tentative stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, the higher the possibility (hereinafter referred to as "reliability") that a jackpot will ultimately be announced.

Specifically, if the result of the big winning lottery is a jackpot, the selection ratio of variable mode commands with a large number of variable displays is set higher than the selection ratio of variable mode commands with a small number of variable displays, When the result of the big winning lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable displays is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable displays.

Moreover, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the developed reach variation pattern. Therefore, reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player can expect that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c will be temporarily stopped displaying (fluctuating displays) more frequently. We will be watching the direction of the performance while hoping that it will be a success.

The above-described execution pattern of the variation effect is determined and executed by the sub-control board 330 based on the variation command determined by the main control board 300. In other words, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable performance is determined by the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 working together.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a variable performance determination table according to a reference example of performance. FIG. 64(a) shows a first half variable performance determination table, and FIG. 64(b) shows a second half variable performance determination table. As described above, when the major prize lottery is performed in the main control board 300, a variable command is determined based on the result of the major prize lottery, and each determined command is transmitted to the sub control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the variation mode command, it obtains a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the first half variation production determination table to determine the obtained production random number and the received variation mode command. Based on this, the execution pattern of the first half of the variable performance is determined. In addition, upon receiving the variation pattern command, it obtains a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the latter half variation production determination table, and based on the obtained production random number and the received variation pattern command, Determine the execution pattern for the second half of the variable performance. In addition, in FIG. 64, only a part of the first half variable performance determination table and the second half variable performance determination table are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 64, according to the first half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variable performance is set for each variable mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the second half variable performance is set for each variable pattern number (variation pattern command). Then, one variable performance is executed by combining and executing the execution patterns of the first and second half variable performances that have been determined.

For the fluctuation performance of the no-reach fluctuation pattern, "None" is determined as the first half execution pattern, indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, and "Normal Loss 1" corresponding to the no-reach fluctuation pattern is determined as the second half execution pattern. , "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined. For example, when receiving a variation mode command corresponding to a variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the first half of the variation effect is not executed, the sub control board 330 always determines "None" as the first half execution pattern. At this time, the second half of the variable pattern commands that can be received at the same time is set such that only one of "Normal Loss 1", "Normal Loss 2", "Special Loss 1", and "Special Loss 2" is determined. The selection ratio is set in the variable performance determination table. Therefore, "None" is determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and "Normal loss 1", "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined as the execution patterns for the second half. The performance execution pattern will be determined to be the above-mentioned non-reach variable pattern.

On the other hand, for the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, a value other than "none" was determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and one of the reach development effects (indicated by development 1 to 5 in the figure) was determined as the execution pattern for the second half. Executed in case. In other words, in the main performance display section 200a, when a fluctuation performance of a reach fluctuation pattern is executed, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to a fluctuation mode number other than fluctuation mode number = 01H is always received, and the development This means that a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number determined to be one of 1 to 5 has been received.

Here, in FIG. 64(a), in the first half of the execution pattern, "Normal Reach 1", "Normal Reach 2", etc., the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are in the reach mode among the fluctuation effects of the normal reach variation pattern, respectively. In more detail, it shows the background image and the fluctuating display pattern of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c displayed on the main performance display section 200a until the reach development performance is started. These image patterns are designed in advance to match the time of the variable display of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number. For example, when "Normal reach 1" is determined, the patterns shown in FIGS. The image shown in (d) will be displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 64(a), "pseudo 2a" etc. in the first half execution pattern are displayed on the main performance display section 200a among the fluctuation performances of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern until the reach development performance is started. This shows the display pattern of the main variation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner. For example, "Pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern of "Pseudo 2" in which the number of variation displays of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is 2 times, and the main variation production image is display pattern a. It shows. In addition, "Pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern of "Pseudo 3" in which the number of variation displays of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is three times, and the main variation production image is display pattern b. It shows.

In addition, in the first half variation production determination table and the second half variation production determination table shown in FIG. 64, the variation production of the no reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big prize lottery is a loss. , the selection ratio has been set. In addition, the developed reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both when you lose and when you hit the jackpot, but the developed reach variation pattern has a higher selection ratio when you lose than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, and when you hit the jackpot. The selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio for the time of loss and the time of jackpot, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to have higher reliability than the developed reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach variation patterns, the higher the number of pseudos, the higher the selection ratio when hitting the jackpot, and the lower the selection ratio when losing. is being done.

As described above, the general flow of the variable effect is determined by the variable effect determination table, but at the start of the variable effect, the various element effects that make up the variable effect are determined based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Execution capability and execution pattern are further determined. Here, the element effects include, for example, as described above, the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c on the main effect display section 200a, the development image displayed on the main effect display section 200a in the reach development effect, Furthermore, it refers to all performances that constitute a variable performance, such as a performance that moves the performance accessory device 202. In the embodiment, preview performances (suggestive performances) are executed at various timings during the fluctuation performance as element performances that constitute the fluctuation performance.

This preview performance is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a and the performance role device 202 is moved at a predetermined timing when the fluctuation performance starts, when the fluctuation patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed again in the fluctuation performance of the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern, and even during the reach development performance, and the possibility of execution and the execution pattern are determined for each preview performance. Each preview performance has multiple types of execution patterns, and for each of the multiple types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each fluctuation pattern command or fluctuation mode command, in other words, for each possibility of winning the jackpot, and an expected value is set for each execution pattern based on this selection ratio.

As explained above, when the sub-control board 330 receives a variation command, the execution pattern of the variation production, whether or not each element production can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation production is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. The Rukoto. In this way, the fluctuating performance is performed once for one special symbol fluctuating display, but in the embodiment, a fluctuating performance spanning a plurality of special symbol fluctuating displays is also performed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display performance according to a reference example of performance. A hold display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main performance display section 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 58 to 63, the hold display area 211 is always displayed on the main performance display section 200a even during variable performance or while waiting for a game. During the variable performance, a hold display effect is performed in this hold display area 211. In the hold display performance, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big winning lottery, and stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area. A first hold display 212b, a second hold display 212c, a third hold display 212d, and a fourth hold display 212e are displayed in the hold display area 211, respectively indicating the hold being held. Note that, hereinafter, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are collectively referred to as the hold display 212.

For example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 pendings are stored in the main RAM 300c, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the pending display 212a, the first pending display A total of five pending displays 212, 212b to 4th pending display 212e, are displayed in the pending display area 211. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the special 1 pending stored in the first storage section is read out to the processing area (0th storage section), a big prize lottery is carried out, and the main RAM 300c When the hold shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to fourth hold display 212e are moved one place to the left. . Furthermore, when the next special 1 hold is read out from this state, each hold display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 65(c). In this way, the hold display performance is a performance that notifies the player of the number of Special 1 holds stored in the main RAM 300c.

Further, a plurality of display patterns of the hold display 212 are provided, and the display color is made different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when the hold is stored, the performance determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536) is executed, and the fluctuation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out to the 0th storage unit. A prefetch designation command indicating the following is sent to the sub control board 330. When the sub control board 330 receives the prefetch designation command, it determines a display pattern for the hold display corresponding to the newly stored hold based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each prefetch designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored reservation is read out in the big winning lottery. In other words, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set depending on whether the jackpot is won or not and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot is suggested by the display pattern of the pending display 212. That will happen.

Figure 66 (a) is a diagram explaining the final hold display pattern determination table, and Figure 66 (b) is a diagram explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table. As described above, in the acquisition time performance determination process in the main control board 300, a look-ahead designation command indicating the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the newly stored hold is read out is sent to the sub-control board 330. In other words, the look-ahead designation command is a command that transmits the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the hold is read out to the sub-control board 330. According to the final hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 is set for each look-ahead designation command (variation pattern number), and when a look-ahead designation command is received, the final display pattern of the hold display 212, i.e., the final display pattern of the hold display 212a, is determined.

According to the final pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the eight types of display patterns "Rainbow)" is determined. When the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the previously displayed pending display 212 is determined by referring to the previous pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66(b). Determined by According to this previous pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the pending display 212.

For example, in the main control board 300, when a hold is stored in the second storage section of the first special figure hold storage area, the final hold display pattern determination table is referred to, and the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined. Suppose that is determined. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined with reference to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the previously determined pending display 212a. For example, when the final display pattern of the relevant hold display 212a is "blue", according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is "blinking" at 200/250. "Blue" is determined with a probability of 50/250.

In this way, when the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined, next, the previous hold display pattern determination table is again determined based on the display pattern of the first hold display 212b determined previously. With reference to this, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is determined.

As described above, when a hold is stored, first, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then, based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, the first hold is Display patterns are sequentially determined so that the display order is reversed, such as the display pattern of display 212b being determined. According to the previous pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the previously determined display pattern of the pending display 212 or has low reliability is determined. has been done.

As described above, in the hold display effect, a plurality of display patterns are provided for the hold display 212 with different expected values for giving a predetermined gaming profit. The pending display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern from when it is first displayed on the main effect display section 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern may change during the display period. In some cases.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes is when the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) is moved to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It can be roughly divided into the timing when the target is suspended, and the timing when the target is being changed due to the target being put on hold.

Next, we will explain the processing in the sub-control board 330 to execute the above-mentioned variable performance. Note that, in the following, we will omit explanations of the processing in the sub-control board 330 that is not related to the variable performance.

(Sub-CPU Initialization Processing of the Sub-Control Board 330)
FIG. 67 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 relating to the reference example of performance.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b, and also initializes and sets flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each performance random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the process of step S1000-3 until an interrupt process is performed. Note that a plurality of types of performance random numbers are provided, and here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of sub-control board 330)
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined period (30 times per second). Upon generation of a clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the registers.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing to permit interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs updating processing of various timer counters used in the sub control board 330. Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and stop subtraction when they reach 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c, and performs various processes according to the received commands. In the sub control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in a reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the reception buffer by command reception interrupt processing is analyzed.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and performs time schedule management processing that executes processing corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the timetable. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or commands are sent to each production device to perform various effects such as variable production and major production. It will control the execution of the performance.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and ends the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch designation command reception process according to a presentation reference example that is executed when a prefetch designation command is received, among the command analysis processes described above. As described above, the prefetch designation command (prefetch designation variation pattern command) is set in the acquisition time performance determination process (step S536-11 in FIG. 30) in the main control board 300, and then in the subcommand transmission process (step S536-11 in FIG. 20). The information is sent to the sub control board 330 in step S100-65).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a stores the preliminary determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1 above. Note that the sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the second special symbol reservation storage area. An information storage section is provided. The first preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections: a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first preliminary determination information storage section correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections, first to fourth storage sections, and the first to fourth storage sections of the second preliminary determination information storage section are as follows: They respectively correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, among the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage section corresponding to the storage section in which the reservation is newly stored is selected. Pre-determination information is stored in .

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs a final pending display pattern determination process to determine the final display pattern of the pending display 212. Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 66(a)) is referred to, and the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined and stored.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times to determine the display pattern of the hold display 212, that is, the change timing of the hold display 212, based on the storage unit in which the hold is stored, and updates the previous hold display pattern determination table by the derived number of times. With reference to (FIG. 66(b)), the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined. Then, the display pattern information of the determined hold display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage section, and the process moves to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process to start displaying the hold display 212 based on the decisions in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. Thereby, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a variable command reception process that is executed when a variable command is received, among the command analysis processes related to the production reference example. As described above, the variation command is set in the main control board 300 in the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612-19 in FIG. 38), and then sub-command by the subcommand transmission process (step S100-65 in FIG. It is transmitted to the control board 330.

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and determines the execution pattern of the latter half of the variable effect based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-1. Decide, remember.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variable mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in the above step S1000-3, and determines and stores the execution pattern of the variable performance for the first half based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis result in the above step S1220-5.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 above for each preview performance, and based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5 above. , and determines and stores whether or not each preview performance is to be executed and the execution pattern by referring to each preview performance determination table.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes a shift process to shift the preliminary determination information stored in the preliminary determination information storage section. Here, when starting a variable effect based on special 1 suspension, the preliminary determination information stored in the fourth storage section to the second storage section of the first preliminary determination information storage section is replaced with the first preliminary determination information. When shifting to the third storage section to the first storage section of the storage section and starting a variable performance based on special 2 suspension, the information is stored in the fourth storage section to the second storage section of the second preliminary determination information storage section. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information is shifted to the third storage section to the first storage section of the second pre-determination information storage section, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process to move and display the hold display 212. Moreover, here, when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the decisions made in each of the above steps, and ends the variable command reception process. In addition, based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, processing for displaying images for variable effects on the main effect display section 200a, audio output processing, lighting control processing for the effect lighting device 204, etc. Performance execution control will be performed.

<Example>
Next, examples of the present invention will be described. Note that changes from the above reference example will be explained below. Unless otherwise specified, each example described below is the same as the reference example above, and the same configuration and processing as the reference example above are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the reference example, and details thereof. Further explanation will be omitted. Therefore, each embodiment includes all of the configurations described in the reference example above except for the changes described below. Note that the codes, step numbers, names, etc. used in each example shown below may be the same as the codes, step numbers, names, etc. used in other examples, but these are applicable only within each example. shall be carried out. However, the present invention may be used in combination with the configurations in each of the embodiments shown below.

<First example>
The gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment has the same gaming properties as the above-mentioned reference example. Here, in the gaming machine 100, a power outage may occur during a game. When a power outage occurs, the game is interrupted and nothing is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. After that, when the power is turned on again, the main control board 300 executes CPU initialization processing, and the game can be resumed. When the power is turned on again, the sub CPU initialization process is executed on the sub control board 330 as well as on the main control board 300.

The sub-control board 330 executes the sub-CPU initialization process, and by receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 returns the screen display to the main effect display section 200a. However, due to some reason such as noise, the sub control board 330 may not be able to properly receive commands. In this case, depending on the displayed image, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust. Below, a configuration for reducing a player's sense of distrust upon recovery from a power outage will be described in detail.

FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the first embodiment. Note that the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment includes all the configurations of the gaming machine 100 described in the reference example above. In the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment, an effect display device 350 is provided which is connected to the sub-control board 330 on both sides. The effect display device 350 is connected to the main effect display section 200a, and performs image display control to display an image on the main effect display section 200a.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls various effects such as during gaming and on standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. . The sub CPU 330a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on commands transmitted from the main control board 300, input signals from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and controls execution of effects. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 330a.

Further, the sub-control board 330 moves the performance accessory device 202 and controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 204, as well as performs audio output control to cause the audio output device 206 to output audio. Furthermore, when an operation detection signal is input from the performance operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the performance operation device 208 has been pressed, a predetermined performance is executed.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. The power supply board is also provided with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor.

FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the effect display device 350 according to the first embodiment. The effect display device 350 includes a display control CPU 350a, an image ROM 350b, an image RAM 350c, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 350d, and a VRAM (Video RAM) 350e. Frame buffer 350f and capture area 350g are part of the storage area in VRAM 350e.

The effect display device 350 performs image display control to display an image on the main effect display section 200a based on commands transmitted from the sub-control board 330, input signals from the timer, and the like. The display control CPU 350a performs display control to display the image of the determined effect on the main effect display section 200a. The image RAM 350c functions as a data work area during processing by the display control CPU 350a. The image ROM 350b stores a large amount of image data such as performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and backgrounds displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

Here, the main effect display section 200a displays a moving image effect image by, for example, displaying 30 still images per second. Hereinafter, one frame is called a frame. For example, in the case of a 60 second effect image, the effect image is composed of 60 seconds x 30 frames, a total of 1800 frames. Note that if the presentation time of the presentation image is different, the number of frames forming the presentation image will also be different.

The display control CPU 350a outputs detailed control signals to the VDP 350d according to the content of the performance. Based on the control signals received from the display control CPU 350a, the VDP 350d reads the image data required for drawing from the image ROM 350b and stores it in the VRAM 350e.

The VDP 350d expands the image data on the VRAM 350e into the frame buffer 350f frame by frame. A priority is set for the image data, and in the frame buffer 350f, a plurality of image data are superimposed according to the priority. In the frame buffer 350f, images of low priority image data are placed on the lower (back) side in the stacking direction, and as the priority increases, images are placed on the upper (front) side in the stacking direction. be done. In other words, the frame buffer 350f functions as a work area for generating image data (composite image data) representing one frame image.

The VDP 350d drives the effect display device 350 based on the image data (composite image data) developed in the frame buffer 350f. As a result, an image of the image data (composite image data) developed in the frame buffer 350f is displayed on the main effect display section 200a for each frame.

The capture area 350g temporarily stores image data (intermediate image data) of an intermediate image (an image before being completed as a frame image) during the creation of one frame image.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating subcommand group setting processing in the main control board 300 according to the first embodiment. Note that in the subcommand group set processing according to the first embodiment, the processing from S110-1 to S110-21 is the same as the subcommand group set processing according to the above reference example, and the processing after S110-23 is the same as the above-mentioned processing. This is executed in addition to the subcommand group set processing according to the reference example. Therefore, the explanation of the processing from S110-1 to S110-21 will be omitted here, and the processing from S110-23 onward will be explained.

(Step S110-23)
The main CPU 300a performs a power failure recovery command setting process to set a power failure recovery command indicating power failure recovery after a power failure in the transmission buffer. That is, when the power is turned on again when a power outage occurs, a power outage recovery command is sent from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330. Although details will be described later, when the sub-control board 330 receives the power failure recovery command, it executes a process of displaying an effect image and a pending effect display.

(Step S110-25)
The main CPU 300a sets a gaming state change designation command indicating the gaming state before power outage in the transmission buffer. That is, when the power is turned on again when a power outage occurs, a game state change designation command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330. Although details will be described later, when the sub-control board 330 receives the gaming state change designation command, it executes a process of displaying an effect image related to the gaming state before the power cutoff.

Figure 74 is a flow chart explaining the special symbol changing process in the main control board 300 according to the first embodiment. Note that in the special symbol changing process according to the first embodiment, the processes from S620-1 to S620-27 are the same as the special symbol changing process according to the above reference example, and the processes from S620-29 onwards are executed in addition to the special symbol changing process according to the above reference example. Therefore, here, the explanation of the processes from S620-1 to S620-27 will be omitted, and only the processes from S620-29 onwards will be explained.

(Step S620-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not to start the stop display of the special symbols. As a result, if the stop display of the special symbol is to be started, the process moves to step S620-31, and if the stop display of the special symbol is not to be started, the special symbol variation processing is ended.

(Step S620-31)
The main CPU 300a sets a gaming state change designation command indicating the gaming state at the start of the stop display of the special symbols in the transmission buffer. That is, at the start of the stop display of the special symbols, a game state change designation command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330. Although details will be described later, when the sub-control board 330 receives the gaming state change designation command, it executes a process of displaying an effect image related to the gaming state.

In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on again when a power outage occurs, an image related to the return of the screen display is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. This display allows the player to be informed that the screen is being restored. Below, images related to the return of screen display will be explained.

FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an image related to the return of screen display according to the first embodiment. As will be described in detail later, when the power is turned back on when a power outage occurs, the effect display device 350 performs a SATA preparation process that is a preparation process related to screen display. The SATA preparation process is a process in which the display control CPU 350a develops image data such as the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c and the background stored in the image ROM 350b into the image RAM 350c, and allows the image data to be displayed on the main effect display section 200a. This is the process of preparing for this.

The sub-control board 330 displays images related to the return of the screen display on the main effect display section 200a before and after the SATA preparation process by the effect display device 350. The images displayed on the main effect display section 200a transition in the order of FIG. 75(a), FIG. 75(b), and FIG. 75(c).

In the image regarding the screen display recovery, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the message "Screen display recovering" is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a. In other words, when the power is restored after a power outage, the message image "Screen display recovering" is displayed.

In this way, by displaying the message image while the screen display is being restored, when a power outage occurs and the power is turned back on, the player can understand that the screen is being restored. Can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the main effect display section 200a displays a message saying, "Screen display is returning. Please continue playing the game." This message image indicating that the game can be continued is displayed after the SATA preparation by the effect display device 350 is completed. When the image is displayed on the screen, the player can understand that it is possible to continue playing the game.

Here, if the power to the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 is cut off at the same time, the main control board 300 sets a wait processing time and executes the wait processing until the SATA preparation processing by the effect display device 350 is completed. . Specifically, the main control board 300 executes a wait processing time setting process (step S100-3 in FIG. 19) in the CPU initialization process. For example, the main CPU 300a sets the timer counter as the wait processing time to 8 to 10 seconds, which is enough to complete the SATA preparation process. Thereby, the main control board 300 performs a waiting process until the SATA preparation process by the effect display device 350 is completed, and can restart the game at the timing when a message image indicating that the game can be continued is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), the main effect display section 200a displays an effect image according to the gaming state and an image of the pending display effect. This image display is performed after the message image (FIG. 75(b)) indicating that the game can be continued is displayed, and then the main control board 300 sends a command related to the screen display to the sub-control board 330, and the sub-control board 330 sends the command to the sub-control board 330. When received, it is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Thereby, it is possible to restore the screen display according to the gaming state before the power outage occurred.

In FIG. 75(c), the screen display corresponding to the gaming state before the power cut is restored, but for example, various effect images are displayed in the main effect display section 200a, and various effect images are superimposed on this effect image. Then, performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed. Further, a hold display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main performance display section 200a. The hold display area 211 is always displayed on the main performance display section 200a even during variable performance or while waiting for a game.

During the variable performance, a hold display effect is performed in this hold display area 211. In the hold display performance, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big winning lottery, and stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area. A first hold display 212b, a second hold display 212c, a third hold display 212d, and a fourth hold display 212e are displayed in the hold display area 211, respectively indicating the hold being held. Note that, hereinafter, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are collectively referred to as the hold display 212.

Furthermore, in the hold display performance, a special figure 1 hold count display 214a indicating the counter value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter and a special figure 2 hold count display 214b indicating the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter are displayed as hold. It is displayed in area 211. In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation number display 214a and the special figure 2 reservation number display 214b are collectively called the reservation number display 214.

FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating processes executed by the main control board 300 according to the first embodiment and various commands sent to the sub control board 330 in various processes. When executing various processes in the main control board 300, various commands are determined and set in the transmission buffer. The command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by subcommand transmission processing (step S100-65 in FIG. 20). The sub-control board 330 performs various processes according to the received commands.

As shown in FIG. 76, the CPU initialization process includes a model command, a setting value specification command, a special figure 1 hold specification command, a special figure 2 hold specification command, a number of times command, and a variation pattern selection state specification command. , a special figure phase designation command, a customer waiting designation command, a power failure recovery command, and a game state change designation command are set in the transmission buffer. The model command is set in the transmission buffer in the model command setting process (step S110-5 in FIG. 73). The setting value designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the setting value designation command setting process (step S110-7 in FIG. 73). The special figure 1 reservation designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process (step S110-9 in FIG. 73). The special figure 2 hold designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the special figure 2 hold designation command setting process (step S110-11 in FIG. 73). The number of times designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the number of times designation command setting process (step S110-13 in FIG. 73). The fluctuation pattern selection state designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation pattern selection state designation command setting process (step S110-15 in FIG. 73). The special figure phase designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the special figure phase designation command setting process (step S110-17 in FIG. 73). The customer waiting designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the customer waiting designation command setting process (step S110-21 in FIG. 73). The power failure recovery command is set in the transmission buffer in the power failure recovery command setting process (step S110-23 in FIG. 73). The game state change designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S110-25 of FIG. 73.

In the special symbol random number acquisition process, a special symbol suspension designation command, a prefetch symbol type designation command, and a prefetch designation variation pattern command are set in the transmission buffer. The special figure reservation designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the special figure reservation designation command set process (step S535-17 in FIG. 29). The prefetch symbol type designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S536-5 of FIG. The prefetch specified variation pattern command is set in the transmission buffer in step S536-11 of FIG.

In the special symbol fluctuation waiting process, the pending reduction designation command, symbol type designation command, number of times command, gaming state change designation command, customer waiting designation command, setting abnormal state command, and fluctuation pattern command are sent to the transmission buffer. Set. The pending reduction designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol storage area shift process (step S610-9 in FIG. 35 or step S610-55 in FIG. 36). The symbol type designation command is executed in the special symbol symbol determination process (step S610-15 in FIG. 35 or step S610-61 in FIG. 36), step S610-23 in FIG. 35, or step S610-69 in FIG. is set in the transmit buffer. The count command is set in the transmission buffer in step S610-35 of FIG. 35 or step S610-81 of FIG. 36. The gaming state change designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S610-37 of FIG. 35 or step S610-83 of FIG. 36. The customer waiting designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the customer waiting process (step S610-85 in FIG. 36). The setting abnormal state command is set in the transmission buffer in step S611-9 of FIG. The variation pattern command is set in the transmission buffer in step S612-19 of FIG.

In the special symbol variation process, a special symbol stop designation command and a game state change designation command are set in the transmission buffer. The special figure stop designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S620-21 of FIG. The game state change designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S620-31 of FIG.

In the special symbol stop symbol display process, an opening designation command and a designation command for checking the game status when the special symbol is confirmed are set in the transmission buffer. The opening designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S630-21 of FIG. 41. The designation command for checking the game status when the special symbol is confirmed is set in the transmission buffer in step S630-29 of FIG. 41.

In this way, when various processes are executed on the main control board 300, various commands are sent to the sub control board 330 in accordance with the processes. When the power is turned back on when a power outage occurs, the sub-control board 330 causes the main effect display section 200a to display various images in accordance with various commands sent in various processes in the main control board 300.

Next, processing of the sub control board 330 related to recovery from power failure will be explained. In addition, below, the process related to the restoration of the screen display immediately after power failure recovery will be described, and the description of other processes will be omitted. When the power is turned on again when a power outage occurs, the sub control board 330 executes sub CPU initialization processing. By executing this initialization process, the sub-control board 330 can control various effects such as during gaming and on standby.

(Sub-CPU Initialization Processing of the Sub-Control Board 330)
77 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process of the sub control board 330 according to Example 1. The sub-CPU initialization process according to Example 1 is executed in place of the sub-CPU initialization process according to the above-mentioned reference example.

(Step S1010-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b, and also initializes and sets flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1010-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a return screen display process that causes the main effect display section 200a to display a message image (FIG. 75(a)) indicating that the screen display is being returned. Here, the sub CPU 330a transmits a return screen display command to the effect display device 350, for example. In the effect display device 350, upon receiving the return screen display command, the display control CPU 350a causes the main effect display section 200a to display a message image during screen display recovery stored in the image ROM 350b. In addition, in the return screen display process, the sub CPU 330a may cause the main effect display section 200a to display a message image during screen display return stored in the sub ROM 330b.

(Step S1010-5)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs SATA preparation standby processing. Here, the sub CPU 330a transmits a start command for causing the effect display device 350 to execute the SATA preparation process. When the effect display device 350 receives the start command, it starts the SATA preparation process.

(Step S1010-7)
Next, the sub-CPU 330a judges whether the SATA preparation process is completed in the performance display device 350. As described above, the performance display device 350 starts the SATA preparation process when it receives a start command from the sub-control board 330. The time required for the SATA preparation process in the performance display device 350 is 8 to 10 seconds. When the SATA preparation process is completed in the performance display device 350, the display control CPU 350a sends an end command to the sub-control board 330.

In the SATA preparation waiting process, the sub-control board 330 waits to receive an end command from the performance display device 350. When the end command is received, it is determined that the SATA preparation process is complete, and processing proceeds to step S1010-9.

(Step S1010-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a return completion screen display process that causes the main effect display section 200a to display a message image (FIG. 75(b)) indicating that the game can be continued. Here, the sub CPU 330a transmits a return completion screen display command to the effect display device 350, for example. When the display control CPU 350a of the effect display device 350 receives the return completion screen display command, the display control CPU 350a causes the main effect display unit 200a to display an image related to the return of the screen display stored in the image ROM 350b. Note that the sub CPU 330a may cause the main effect display section 200a to display, for example, an image related to the return of the screen display stored in the sub ROM 330b.

(Step S1010-11)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on a completion flag indicating that SATA preparation is complete.

(Step S1010-13)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each performance random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the process of step S1010-13 until an interrupt process is performed. Note that a plurality of types of performance random numbers are provided, and here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating command reception interrupt processing in the sub control board 330 according to the first embodiment. The command reception interrupt process is executed every time a command is received from the main control board 300 after the start of the sub CPU initialization process. Therefore, here, the command reception interrupt process is executed in the effect display device 350 even before the SATA preparation is completed.

(Step S1300-1)
The sub CPU 330a stores the received command in a buffer.

(Step S1300-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the completion flag is on, that is, whether the SATA preparation process in the effect display device 350 is completed. As a result, if the SATA preparation process is completed, the process moves to step S1300-5, and if the SATA preparation process is not completed, the process moves to step S1300-29.

(Step S1300-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a power failure recovery command has been received. As a result, if a power failure recovery command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-15, and if a power failure recovery command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-7.

(Step S1300-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a variation pattern command is received. As a result, if the variable pattern command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-15, and if the variable pattern command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-9.

(Step S1300-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a special figure stop designation command has been received. As a result, if the special figure stop designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-15, and if the special figure stop designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-11.

(Step S1300-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether an opening designation command has been received. As a result, if the opening designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-15, and if the opening designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-13.

(Step S1300-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a customer waiting designation command has been received. As a result, if the customer waiting designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-15, and if the customer waiting designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-19.

(Step S1300-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a gaming state change designation command or a gaming state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol confirmation is received. As a result, if the game state change designation command or the game state confirmation command when the special figure is confirmed has been received, the process moves to step S1300-17, and the game state change designation command or the game state confirmation command when the special figure is confirmed If it has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-19.

(Step S1300-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs an effect image display process that causes the main effect display section 200a to display an effect image according to the gaming state. Here, the sub CPU 330a transmits, for example, an effect image display command according to the gaming state to the effect display device 350. When the display control CPU 350a of the effect display device 350 receives the effect image display command, the display control CPU 350a causes the main effect display section 200a to display an effect image corresponding to the gaming state stored in the image ROM 350b. Note that the sub CPU 330a may cause the main effect display section 200a to display an effect image corresponding to the gaming state stored in the sub ROM 330b, for example.

(Step S1300-19)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether an effect image corresponding to the gaming state is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. As a result, if the effect image is displayed, the process moves to step S1300-21, and if the effect image is not displayed, the process moves to step S1300-29.

(Step S1300-21)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a special figure reservation designation command has been received. As a result, if the special figure hold designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-27, and if the special figure hold designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-23.

(Step S1300-23)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a hold reduction designation command has been received. As a result, if the hold reduction designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-27, and if the hold reduction designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S1300-25.

(Step S1300-25)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a customer waiting designation command has been received. As a result, if the customer waiting designation command has been received, the process moves to step S1300-27, and if the customer waiting designation command has not been received, the command reception interrupt process is ended.

(Step S1300-27)
The sub CPU 330a performs a pending display image display process to display images of a pending display 212 and a pending number display 214 on the main effect display section 200a. Here, the sub CPU 330a transmits a pending display image display command to the effect display device 350, for example. When receiving the hold display image display command, the display control CPU 350a of the effect display device 350 displays the images of the hold display 212 and the hold number display 214 stored in the image ROM 350b on the main effect display section 200a. Note that the sub CPU 330a may display, for example, the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 stored in the sub ROM 330b on the main effect display section 200a.

(Step S1300-29)
The sub-CPU 330a discards the command stored in the buffer.

As described above, the sub-control board 330 executes the process related to the return of the screen display by receiving the command transmitted by the main control board 300. In the command reception interrupt process in the sub-control board 330 in the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not a power interruption return command, a variable pattern command, a special chart stop designation command, an opening designation command, or a customer waiting designation command (hereinafter referred to as an "image return designation command") has been received as a trigger for executing the effect image display process. When the main control board 300 transmits the image return designation command to the sub-control board 330, it always simultaneously transmits either a game state change designation command or a game state confirmation designation command when the special chart is determined (hereinafter referred to as a "game state identification command"). Therefore, when the sub-control board 330 receives the image return designation command, it determines whether or not a game state identification command has been received, and if it has been properly received, it causes the main effect display unit 200a to display an effect image according to the game state.

In addition, in the main control board 300, when both the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162 are not in fluctuating display or stop display of symbols, in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process (see FIG. 35), , customer waiting processing (S610-85) is executed. In this customer waiting process, in the first timer interrupt process after the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are not in the state of fluctuating symbol display or stop display, the customer wait is specified. A command and a gaming state identification command are set.

Furthermore, when the main control board 300 transmits a power outage recovery command or a fluctuation pattern command to the sub-control board 330, it always simultaneously transmits either a hold designation command, a hold reduction designation command, or a customer waiting designation command (hereinafter referred to as a "hold number recognition command"). Therefore, when the sub-control board 330 receives a power outage recovery command or a fluctuation pattern command, it determines whether or not it has received a hold number recognition command, and if it has been properly received, it causes the main performance display unit 200a to display images of the hold display 212 and the hold number display 214.

That is, when the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 are powered off and are simultaneously and normally restored from the power-off, the sub-control board 330 receives the power-off recovery command sent from the main control board 300. Thereby, the sub control board 330 can simultaneously display the effect image and the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 on the main effect display section 200a.

Specifically, when the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 are powered off and then restored at the same time, the main CPU 300a of the main control board 300 starts CPU initialization processing (FIGS. 19 and 20). do. The main CPU 300a first executes a wait process for a period of time when the SATA preparation process is expected to be completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 300a transmits the command set in the sub-command group setting process (FIG. 21) to the sub-control board 330 in the sub-command transmission process (step S100-65 in FIG. 20). The commands set in the sub-command group set process include a power failure recovery command, a game state change designation command, a special figure 1 reservation designation command, and a special figure 2 reservation designation command.

After the SATA preparation process is completed, the sub-CPU 330a of the sub-control board 330 receives the command sent from the main control board 300. Since the received command includes a power failure recovery command and a game state change designation command, if the sub-CPU 330a has properly received the power failure recovery command and the game state change designation command, it causes the main performance display unit 200a to display a performance image. Since the received command also includes a special chart 1 reservation designation command, etc., if the special chart 1 reservation designation command, etc., has properly received the sub-CPU 330a, it causes the main performance display unit 200a to simultaneously display the performance image, the reservation display 212, and the reservation number display 214 images. As a result, the screen display is restored to the main performance display unit 200a after the power failure is restored.

However, even if the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 lose power and are restored at the same time, due to an error such as a missing command, the sub-control board 330 may not be able to receive the command sent by the CPU initialization process of the main control board 300, and the screen display may not be restored to the main performance display unit 200a.

For example, suppose that the sub-control board 330 is unable to receive the power interruption recovery command and the customer waiting designation command due to an error such as a missing power interruption recovery command and a missing customer waiting designation command. In this case, the sub-control board 330 is unable to receive the image recovery designation command that triggers the execution of the designation image display process, and therefore is unable to display the designation image on the main designation display unit 200a. Even if the sub-control board 330 is able to receive the special chart reservation designation command, the designation image is not displayed, and therefore the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214 are not displayed on the main designation display unit 200a. Also, suppose that the sub-control board 330 is unable to receive the game state change designation command due to an error such as a missing game state change designation command. In this case, similarly, the sub-control board 330 is unable to receive the game state identification command that identifies the game state, and therefore is unable to display the designation image, reservation display 212, and reservation number display 214 on the main designation display unit 200a.

Further, for example, suppose that the sub control board 330 is unable to receive the special figure reservation designation command due to an error such as a loss of the special figure reservation designation command. In this case, if the power failure recovery command and the game state change designation command have been received, the sub control board 330 causes the main performance display section 200a to display the performance image. However, since the pending number recognition command for recognizing the pending number has not been received, the sub control board 330 cannot display the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 on the main effect display section 200a at the same time as the effect image.

In this way, when the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 are cut off and then restored at the same time, there are cases where the screen display cannot be restored to the main performance display unit 200a due to an error such as a missing command. In this case, the sub-control board 330 then restores the display of the performance image to the main performance display unit 200a upon receiving a variation pattern command, a special chart stop command, an opening command, or a customer waiting command. Of these commands, when the sub-control board 330 receives a variation pattern command and a customer waiting command, it also receives a hold number recognition command at the same time. Therefore, the sub-control board 330 simultaneously displays the performance image and the hold display 212 and the hold number display 214 images on the main performance display unit 200a. However, when the special chart stop command or the opening command is received, the sub-control board 330 does not receive the hold number recognition command. Therefore, the sub-control board 330 cannot display the hold display 212 and the hold number display 214 images on the main performance display unit 200a.

For example, suppose that a power failure recovery command cannot be received, and the main performance display unit 200a cannot display the performance image and the reserved display 212 and reserved number display 214 images. In this case, when the main control board 300 subsequently executes the special pattern change processing (Fig. 74), the sub-control board 330 receives a special pattern stop command and a game state change command. As a result, the sub-control board 330 causes the main performance display unit 200a to display a performance image according to the game state. However, the reserved number recognition command is not sent in the special pattern change processing (Fig. 74) executed by the main control board 300. Therefore, since the sub-control board 330 cannot receive the reserved number recognition command, it cannot display the reserved display 212 and reserved number display 214 images simultaneously with the performance image on the main performance display unit 200a. After that, when a hold number recognition command is sent from the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 causes the main performance display unit 200a to display the images of the hold display 212 and hold number display 214.

Further, for example, assume that a power failure recovery command or the like cannot be received and the effect image and the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 cannot be displayed on the main effect display section 200a. In this case, after that, when the main control board 300 executes the special symbol random number acquisition process (FIG. 29), the sub control board 330 receives the special symbol reservation designation command. However, since the effect image is not displayed on the main effect display section 200a, the sub control board 330 does not display the effect image and the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214.

As described above, when the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 recover from a power failure at the same time, the commands sent by the CPU initialization process of the main control board 300 cannot be received due to an error such as missing commands. , the case where the screen display cannot be restored to the main effect display section 200a has been described. However, in addition to this, there are cases where the screen display cannot be restored to the main effect display section 200a due to commands sent by the CPU initialization process. For example, there may be a case where a sub-reset occurs in which only the sub-control board 330 is powered off, or a case where the SATA preparation process of the effect display device 350 takes longer than expected for some reason.

When a sub-reset occurs, the main control board 300 does not experience a power outage. Therefore, the main control board 300 does not execute the CPU initialization process. In other words, the sub-control board 330 cannot receive power outage recovery commands, etc., sent by the CPU initialization process of the main control board 300. Also, if for some reason the SATA preparation process of the performance display device 350 takes longer than expected, the main control board 300 will send a power outage recovery command, etc., before the SATA preparation process is complete. Therefore, power outage recovery commands, etc., received before the SATA preparation process is complete are discarded, and the sub-control board 330 cannot receive power outage recovery commands, etc., sent by the CPU initialization process of the main control board 300 after the SATA preparation process is complete.

Therefore, if a sub-reset occurs or the SATA preparation process takes longer than expected, after that, upon reception of the fluctuation pattern command, special map stop designation command, opening designation command, and customer waiting designation command, The sub-control board 330 causes the main effect display section 200a to restore the display of the effect image. When receiving the variable pattern command and the customer waiting designation command among these commands, the sub control board 330 also receives the pending number recognition command at the same time. Therefore, the sub control board 330 causes the main effect display section 200a to simultaneously display the effect image and the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214. However, when receiving the special figure stop designation command and the opening designation command, the sub control board 330 does not receive the reservation number recognition command. Therefore, the sub control board 330 cannot display the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 on the main effect display section 200a.

For example, when a sub-reset occurs, it is assumed that the main control board 300 executes the special symbol variation process (FIG. 74) after the sub-control board 330 executes the sub-CPU initialization process. Thereafter, the sub control board 330 causes the main performance display section 200a to display a performance image according to the game state in order to receive the special figure stop designation command and the game state change designation command. However, in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 74) executed by the main control board 300, the pending number recognition command is not transmitted. Therefore, since the sub-control board 330 cannot receive the reservation number recognition command, the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214 cannot be displayed simultaneously with the performance images on the main effect display section 200a. Thereafter, when the main control board 300 transmits a pending number recognition command, the sub control board 330 causes the main effect display section 200a to display the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214.

Further, for example, when a sub-reset occurs, the sub-control board 330 executes the sub-CPU initialization process, and then the main control board 300 executes the special symbol random number acquisition process (FIG. 29). After that, the sub control board 330 receives the special figure reservation designation command, but since the effect image is not displayed on the main effect display section 200a, the effect image and the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214 are not displayed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment, when the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330 are powered off and restored at the same time, the main There are cases where the screen display cannot be restored to the effect display section 200a. In this case, when the sub control board 330 receives the special figure stop designation command or the opening designation command, it causes the main performance display section 200a to display the performance image, and does not display the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214. Then, when receiving the reservation number recognition command, the sub control board 330 displays the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214 if the performance image is displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and displays the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214 on the main performance display section 200a. If no performance image is displayed, the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 are not displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of distrust among the players when the power is restored.

Further, according to the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment, when a sub-reset occurs or when SATA preparation processing takes longer than expected, the screen display may not be restored to the main performance display section 200a. In this case, when the sub control board 330 receives the special figure stop designation command or the opening designation command, it causes the main performance display section 200a to display the performance image, and does not display the images of the reservation display 212 and the reservation number display 214. When the sub control board 330 receives the pending number recognition command, if the effect image is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, the sub control board 330 displays the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214, and displays the images of the pending number display 214 on the main effect display section 200a. If no performance image is displayed, the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 are not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the sense of distrust among the players when the power is restored.

<Second example>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the above-mentioned simultaneous operation reference example will be described. Below, changes to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example will be explained. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, of the above-mentioned reference example, portions that are not explained below as changes are naturally included in this example.

FIG. 79 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the second embodiment. The gaming machine 100 according to the second embodiment includes a first starting port 120 arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the first gaming area 116a can enter (enter).

In addition, at the top of the second gaming area 116b, there is a second fixed starting opening 122A into which the gaming ball that has entered the second gaming area 116b can enter (enter), and a second fixed starting opening 122A that allows the gaming ball that has entered the second gaming area 116b to enter. Passable gates 124 are arranged in parallel. In the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the second fixed starting port 122A, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball and special 2 reservation is acquired. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a normal figure reservation is acquired.

A second variable start port 122B is provided below the second fixed start port 122A and the gate 124. When the second variable start port 122B is closed, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 122b. If the movable piece 122b opens while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 122b, all game balls on the movable piece 122b are guided into the second variable start port 122B. When a game ball enters (enters) the second variable start port 122B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball that enters, and a special 2 reserve is acquired.

An out port 131 is provided below the second variable starting port 122B. The out port 131 is the entrance of a passage for discharging game balls from the gaming area 116, and even if a game ball enters the out port 131, no prize ball is paid out.

In addition, the second gaming area 116b is provided with a big winning opening 126, and most of the game balls that have fallen below the out opening 131 roll on the opening/closing door 126b of the big winning opening 126. The game ball on the opening/closing door 126b slowly rolls from the right side to the left side when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front due to the inclination of the opening/closing door 126b.

When the opening/closing door 126b is opened while the game balls are rolling on the opening/closing door 126b, all the game balls on the opening/closing door 126b are guided into the big prize opening 126. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 126 during a big prize game, a predetermined number of two or more (15 in this case) game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball that enters.

At the lower left of the big prize opening 126, a common figure operation opening 125 is provided. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls that fall downward from above the big prize opening 126 enter the normal pattern operation opening 125. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the normal figure operating port 125, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. Further, when a game ball enters the normal figure operation opening 125, a normal figure hold is acquired in the same way as when the game ball passes through the gate 124.

At the bottom of the game area 116, there is a discharge port 130 that discharges game balls that do not enter any of the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, the second fixed starting hole 122A, the second variable starting hole 122B, the general operation hole 125, the big winning hole 126, or the outlet hole 131 from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating the internal configuration of the big prize opening 126. A structure 126x that protrudes toward the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 126x has an opening formed in the upper part, and this opening becomes the big prize opening 126. An opening/closing door 126b is provided at the top of the structure 126x, and normally, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the opening/closing door 126b is maintained in a closed state that closes the big prize opening 126.

The opening/closing door 126b protrudes into the second gaming area 116b so as to face above the gaming machine 100. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 126b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the second gaming area 116b will roll on the opening/closing door 126b. Here, the opening/closing door 126b maintained in the closed state is inclined so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is at a slightly lower position than the right side. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 126b is in the closed state, the game ball that has fallen onto the opening/closing door 126b slowly rolls from the right to the left on the opening/closing door 126b, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 80(a). It will move.

Then, when the big prize game is executed, the opening/closing door 126b changes to an open state in which the big prize opening 126 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the opening/closing door 126b protrudes and retracts from a hole formed in the game board 108 in the front-rear direction of the game machine 100 by an actuator (solenoid) not shown.

Normally, the actuator is maintained in a non-energized state, and the opening/closing door 126b is held in a position protruding from the hole of the game board 108 to the front side, thereby closing the big prize opening 126. Then, when the actuator is energized, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the opening/closing door 126b is held at a position recessed toward the back side of the hole in the game board 108, and the grand prize opening 126 is opened. In this way, the game ball enters the big winning hole 126 in the state where the big winning hole 126 is opened.

And, inside the big prize opening 126, a lead-out path 126d is provided. The bottom of the grand prize opening 126 is inclined so that the game ball that enters the grand prize opening 126 is guided to the lead-out path 126d. The lead-out path 126d is provided with a probability variable region 140a and a non-probability variable region 140d, which are holes through which game balls can pass. 140d, and is discharged to the back side of the game board 108.

The big prize opening 126 is provided with a movable member 140b that opens and closes a probability variable area 140a and a non-probability variable area 140d. This movable member 140b switches between a state in which the game ball can enter into the variable probability area 140a and a state in which it is impossible to enter the game ball into the variable probability area 140a by its movement (sliding). More specifically, when the movable member 140b moves to the position shown in FIG. 80(c), the non-probability variable area 140d is closed by the movable member 140b, allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variable area 140a.

On the other hand, when the movable member 140b is shifted to the position shown in FIG. 80(d), the variable probability area 140a is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the non-variable probability area 140d. As will be described in detail later, if the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a during a specific round of play in a big role game (hereinafter referred to as a specific round game), the game state after the end of the big role game is set to a high probability game state, and if the game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the game state after the end of the big role game is set to a low probability game state.

FIG. 81 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the second embodiment. The main control board 300 includes a general winning opening detection switch 118s that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first starting opening that detects that a gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 120. A detection switch 120s, a second fixed starting port detection switch 122As that detects that a game ball has entered the second fixed starting port 122A, and a second variable switch that detects that a game ball has entered the second variable starting port 122B. Starting port detection switch 122Bs, gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, normal pattern operation opening detection switch 125s that detects that a game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, big prize opening A big prize opening detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball enters the probability variable area 126, and a variable probability area detection switch 140s that detects that a game ball enters the variable probability area 140a are connected, and the main control is performed from these detection switches. A detection signal is input to the substrate 300.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 123c that operates the movable piece 122b of the second variable starting opening 122B, and a big winning opening solenoid 126c that operates the opening/closing door 126b that opens and closes the big winning opening 126. A movable member solenoid 140c that operates a movable member 140b that opens and closes the variable probability area 140a is connected, and the main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the normal electric winning opening 123, the big winning opening 126, and the variable probability area 140a. It looks like this. Note that the configuration of the other control means is the same as that of the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second embodiment. The low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second embodiment is used in place of the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous play reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the second fixed starting port 122A, or the second variable starting port 122B, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 65535. Then, a jackpot determination random number determination table is selected according to the game state when starting the big prize lottery, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number.

In the low-probability game state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the second embodiment, six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the setting value is set to one of six levels, and the random number judgment for determining a jackpot when the probability is low corresponds to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer). A lottery is held with reference to the table.

When the game is in a low probability game state and the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 82 (a). According to this low probability jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10661, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is approximately 1/99.1.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6, a big win is determined by referring to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f shown in FIGS. 82(b) to 82(f). A lottery will be held. According to these low-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/97.7 to 92.2, respectively.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second embodiment. The high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the second embodiment is used in place of the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning lottery for special 1 pending and special 2 pending, the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to.

In the high probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the large winning lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 83(a). will be held. According to this high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 12600, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is approximately 1/25.2.

When the game is in a high probability state and the setting value is set to 2 to 6, the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f shown in Figures 83 (b) to (f). According to these high probability jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/24.3 to 21.1, respectively.

In this way, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example, there is no small win, but only a big win. However, similar to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example, a small win may be provided in the second embodiment as well. In addition, here, the probability of winning a jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered setting value, but the probability of winning a jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is Only the probability of winning may differ depending on the registered setting value. Furthermore, the registered setting value is not essential, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state may always be constant.

FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a winning symbol random number determination table according to the second embodiment. The winning symbol random number determination table according to the second embodiment is used in place of the winning symbol random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the second fixed starting port 122A, or the second variable starting port 122B, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0 to 99. Then, when a determination result of "big hit" is derived from the above-mentioned big winning lottery, the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if you win a "jackpot" by holding special 1, the winning symbol random number determination table for special 1 is selected, as shown in FIG. 84(a), and if you win a "jackpot" by holding special 2. As shown in FIG. 84(b), the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table is selected.

According to the winning symbol random number determination table for special 1 shown in FIG. 84(a) and the winning symbol random number determination table for special 2 shown in FIG. 84(b), depending on the value of the acquired winning symbol random number, As such, jackpot symbols (special symbols A to D) are determined as special symbols.

Specifically, according to the winning symbol random number determination table for special 1, special symbol A is determined when the winning symbol random number is 0 to 96, and special symbol A is determined when the winning symbol random number is 97 to 99. B is determined. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on special 1 reservation, the probability of each jackpot symbol being determined is 97% for special symbol A and 3% for special symbol B.

On the other hand, according to the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table, special symbol C is determined when the winning symbol random number is between 0 and 94, and special symbol D is determined when the winning symbol random number is between 95 and 99. be done. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on special 2 reservation, the probability of each jackpot symbol being determined is 95% for special symbol C and 5% for special symbol D.

FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the second embodiment. The special electric accessory operation ram set table according to the second embodiment is used in place of the special electric accessory operation ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In addition, the special electric accessory actuation ram set table stores various data for controlling the big prize game, and during the big prize game, the special electric accessory actuation ram set table is referred to to control the big prize opening. The solenoid 126c is energized. In fact, there are multiple special electric accessory activation ram set tables for each type of special symbol (jackpot symbol), and depending on the determined special symbol type, the corresponding table is activated at the start of the big prize game. However, for convenience of explanation, control data for special symbols will be shown for each type of symbol.

As shown in FIG. 85, the big winning game consists of a plurality of round games in which the big prize opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. According to this special electric accessory operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game starts), the maximum number of special electric accessory operation operations (round game executed during one big prize game) ), the number of special electric accessory opening/closing switching times (the number of openings of the grand prize opening 126 during one round), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the grand prize opening solenoid 126c for each number of openings of the grand prize opening 126, that is, 1 the opening time of the grand prize opening 126), the specified number (the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the grand prize opening 126 in one round game), the effective closing time of the grand prize opening (the closing time of the grand prize opening 126 between round games) , that is, the interval time), the ending time (the waiting time from the end of the last round game until the normal special game (fluctuation display of symbols described below) is restarted) are the control data of the special symbols. Each type is stored in advance as shown in the figure.

When a jackpot is won by special 1 hold and special symbols A and B are determined as jackpot symbols, a big prize game consisting of three round games is executed. In these big prize games, the big prize opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to third round games. In the first and third round games, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and in the second round game, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for 0.1 seconds. When the specified number of game balls enter the grand prize opening 126 while it is open, or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds or 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, the grand prize opening 126 will be closed and one game will be played. The round game ends.

In addition, when a jackpot is won due to the special 2 hold and the special symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol, a major prize game consisting of two round games is executed. In this big winning game, the big prize opening 126 is opened only once in the first and second round games. In each round game, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. 126 is closed and one round game ends.

In addition, when a jackpot is won due to the special 2 hold and the special symbol D is determined as the jackpot symbol, a major prize game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In this big winning game, the big prize opening 126 is opened only once in the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter the ball during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the grand prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating the opening and closing of the large prize opening 126 and the opening and closing of the variable probability area 140a by the movable member 140b in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the second round of play is set as a specific round of play, and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 126 during the second round of play enters the variable probability area 140a, the game state after the large prize play becomes a high probability game state. As shown in Figure 86, the movable member 140b opens the variable probability area 140a for a moment (about 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the opening of the large prize opening 126 during the second round of play, and then maintains the variable probability area 140a in a closed state for a predetermined time, and then maintains the variable probability area 140a in an open state again.

As shown in FIG. 86, when the special symbols A and B are determined, the large prize opening 126 is opened for only 0.1 seconds from the start of the second round of play. Even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 126 during this time, it takes a certain amount of time for the game ball to reach the special prize area 140a. Therefore, when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 126 reaches the special prize area 140a, the special prize area 140a is always closed. As a result, when the special symbols A and B are determined and the big prize game is executed, the game ball will not enter the special prize area 140a.

In addition, if an unforeseen event occurs, such as a game ball getting stuck in the big prize opening 126, or a game ball getting stuck in the big prize opening 126 for a long time for some reason, the game ball may enter the probability change area 140a even in a big role game in which special symbols A and B are determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, for ease of understanding, the words "always" and "certainly" are used, but this is based on the assumption that the state of the gaming machine 100 is appropriate for playing the game and that no unforeseen event has occurred, and does not mean a physical 100% probability.

On the other hand, when the special symbols C and D are determined and the big winning game is executed, the big prize opening 126 is opened once for 29.0 seconds from the start of the second round game. Therefore, there is a possibility that about 1 to 2 game balls that enter the big winning hole 126 at the same time as the big winning hole 126 is opened may not be able to enter the probability variable area 140a, but after that, they enter the big winning hole 126. The entered game ball can reliably enter the variable probability area 140a.

FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating a gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the big prize game according to the second embodiment. The game state setting table according to the second embodiment is used in place of the game state setting table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In the second embodiment, when a big prize game is executed, the game state is determined depending on the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol), whether or not the game ball passes (enters) into the variable probability area 140a, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Refer to the setting table and set the gaming state after the end of the big prize game.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a in a specific round game, the game state after the big prize game is set to a low probability game state, regardless of the type of special symbol. Further, when a game ball enters the variable probability area 140a in a specific round game, the game state after the big prize game is set to a high probability game state, regardless of the type of special symbol.

When the gaming state after the big winning game is set to a high probability gaming state, the high probability number of times is set to 50. That is, when the high probability gaming state is set, when the big winning lottery is executed 50 times, the gaming state is changed to the low probability gaming state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, apart from the special game states (low-probability game state and high-probability game state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot related to a special game is defined, the probability of winning a jackpot related to a normal game is defined. A normal gaming state is set. Here, a non-time-saving game state and a time-saving game state are provided as the normal game state. At this time, the time saving number indicating the number of times the time saving gaming state continues varies depending on the type of special symbol, whether or not the game ball enters the probability variable area 140a, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, etc. Incidentally, the number of times of time saving indicates the total number of times of the big winning lottery based on special 1 pending and the number of big winning winnings drawing based on special 2 pending until the time saving gaming state ends.

For example, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, the time saving number is set to 50 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In addition, if special pattern A is determined and the game ball enters the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the number of time-saving times will be set to 50, regardless of the game state at the time of the big win.

Further, when the special symbol B is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In addition, when the special symbol B is determined and the game ball enters the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In addition, when the special symbol C is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, the number of time saving times is set to 50 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In addition, when the special symbol C is determined and the game ball enters the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times is 10000. set to times.

In addition, when the special symbol C is determined and the game ball enters the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a high probability game state and a game state other than the time saving game state, A non-time saving gaming state is set (the number of time saving times is set to 0).

In addition, when the special symbol D is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

In addition, if the special symbol D is determined and the game ball enters the probability change area 140a during a specific round of play, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, regardless of the game state at the time of the big win.

In addition, as described above, whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a actually depends on the type of special symbol in which the opening/closing manner of the big prize opening 126 in the specific round game is defined. If the game is played properly, when special symbols A and B are determined, the game ball will not enter the probability variable area 140a during a specific round game, and when special symbols C and D are determined. In this way, the game ball can always enter the variable probability area 140a during a specific round game. Therefore, assuming that the game is played properly, after the big win game, the game state will be set as shown by the thick line in FIG. 87. In other words, the gaming states other than those enclosed by thick lines in FIG. 87 can be said to be gaming states that are set when irregularities occur. Below, the game will be explained when the game is played properly, and the explanation about the game when irregularities occur will be omitted.

Figure 88 is a diagram explaining the game states according to the embodiment. As described above, in the embodiment, a special game state and a normal game state are combined to form one game state. Here, as shown in Figure 88 (a), a game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state is called a normal state, a game state combining a low probability game state and a time-saving game state is called a time-saving state or a precursor state, a game state combining a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state is called a latent state, and a game state combining a high probability game state and a time-saving game state is called a probability-changing state.

In addition, in the first special symbol display 160, the variation time during which the symbol variation is displayed based on the Special 1 reservation, and in the second special symbol display 162, the variation time during which the symbol variation is displayed based on the Special 2 reservation. The time is set as shown in FIG. 88(b) depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the variable time determined based on special 1 hold is set to 3 seconds to 100 seconds, and the variable time determined based on special 2 hold is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, in the normal state, the major prize drawing based on Toku 1 reservation and the fluctuating display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as Toku 1 fluctuation) are subject to actual fluctuation, and the major prize lottery and fluctuating display of symbols based on Toku 2 reservation (hereinafter referred to as Toku 2 fluctuation) are subject to change. fluctuations) are treated as irregular. Therefore, in the normal state, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 120, the player must perform what is called a left-handed hit and cause the game ball to flow down into the first game area 116a.

In addition, in the time saving state, precursor state, latent state, and variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation is shorter than in the normal state. Since special 2 fluctuations are more advantageous than special 1 fluctuations, special 2 fluctuations are subject to real fluctuations in short-time states, precursory states, latent states, and certain variable states, and special 1 fluctuations are treated as irregular. be exposed. In this way, due to the variation times of the special 1 fluctuation and special 2 fluctuation, as shown by the bold line box in FIG. 2 fluctuations are subject to real fluctuations.

FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the gaming state according to the original gaming nature according to the second embodiment. With the above configuration, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following gaming experience. Note that here, a case will be described in which the registration setting value is set to "1". First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in FIG. 89(a). In the normal state, since the actual variable target is set to special 1 pending, the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first starting port 120. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player will play what is called "left-handed play" in the normal state.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a special 1 reserve is stored in the first special chart reserve memory area. The special 1 reserves stored in the first special chart reserve memory area are read out sequentially when the starting conditions are met, and a lottery for a big win is held based on the read special 1 reserves. At this time, the probability of winning a big win is set to approximately 1/99.1. Under normal circumstances, the game is played with the aim of winning a big win in the lottery for a big win based on this special 1 reserve.

Then, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won in the big winning lottery by special 1 reservation, the big winning game is executed. In this big winning game, a round game in which the big prize opening 126 is opened is executed three times. Then, when a jackpot is won due to special 1 retention, one of the special symbols A to B is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the gaming state after the big winning game becomes the time saving state shown in FIG. 89(b). When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 97%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, the gaming state will shift to the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) with a probability of 97%.

In the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), since the actual variable target is set to special 2 hold, the player may enter the game ball into the second fixed starting port 122A or the second variable starting port 122B. A game ball is fired toward the second game area 116b. Since the second game area 116b is located on the right side of the game board 108, the player performs the so-called "right-handed play" in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)).

In addition, when shifting to the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the number of time saving times is set to 50, and if the jackpot is not won in the 50 big prize drawings, the gaming state will shift to the normal state again. Naru (time saving).

Further, in the normal state (FIG. 89(a)), if the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is special symbol B, the gaming state after the big winning game is as shown in FIG. 89(c). This results in the precursory state shown in . When winning a jackpot with special 1 pending, the probability that special symbol B will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 3%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 3% probability that the gaming state will shift to the precursor state.

In the precursor state, since the actual variable target is set to special 2 hold, the player aims at the second gaming area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the second fixed starting port 122A or the second variable starting port 122B. He will be hitting right-handed.

In the premonition state (Figure 89 (c)), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/99.1, but since the normal game state is a time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b frequently opens. Therefore, the player can participate in the big prize lottery while reducing the consumption of game balls.

Further, when the special symbol B is determined as the jackpot symbol and the state shifts to the precursor state, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000. In the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/99.1, so it can be said that the state is substantially guaranteed to win the next jackpot. In addition, if a jackpot is not won in the 10,000 big winning lottery, the gaming state will shift to the normal state again (time saving exit).

In the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) and the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), since the actual variable target is set to special 2 hold, the player can use the second fixed starting port 122A or the second variable starting port In order to make the game ball enter 122B, the player will hit the ball to the right aiming at the second game area 116b.

When a game ball enters the second fixed starting port 122A or the second variable starting port 122B, special 2 reservation is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are sequentially read out when the starting condition is met, and a big prize lottery is performed based on the read special 2 reservations.

Then, in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) or the foreshadowing state (FIG. 89(c)), if a jackpot is won in the big winning lottery based on special 2 reservation, the big winning game is executed. In this big winning game, a round game in which the big prize opening 126 is opened is executed twice or ten times. Then, when a jackpot is won due to special 2 reservation, one of the special symbols C to D is determined as the jackpot symbol.

If the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is the special symbol C in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) or the omen state (FIG. 89(c)), the gaming state after the big winning game becomes a latent state as shown in FIG. 89(c). When winning a jackpot with special 2 pending, the probability that special symbol C will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 95%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) or the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), there is a 95% probability that the gaming state will shift to the latent state (FIG. 89(d)).

When the game transitions to the latent state (Fig. 89(d)), the number of high probability wins is set to 50, and if no big win is won in the 50 big win draws, the game state will transition back to the normal state (Fig. 89(a)) (ST skip).

In addition, in the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), if the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is the special symbol C, the gaming state after the big winning game will be in the latent state (FIG. 89(d)). 89(d)).

In addition, in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), and the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is the special symbol. In the case of D, the gaming state after the big winning game becomes a variable probability state shown in FIG. 89(e).

When winning the jackpot with special 2 pending, the probability that special symbol D will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 5%. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the time saving state (Fig. 89(b)), the precursor state (Fig. 89(c)), and the latent state (Fig. 89(d)), there is a 5% probability that the gaming state will change to the probability variable state ( The process moves to FIG. 89(e)).

In addition, in the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), if the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 are special symbols C and D, the gaming state after the big winning game is again in the variable probability state. (FIG. 89(e)). Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), the gaming state is set again to the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)) with a 100% probability.

Note that when shifting to the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), the high probability number of times is set to 50 times and the time saving number of times is set to 10,000 times. At this time, if the jackpot is not won in the 50 big winning lottery, the gaming state will shift to the omen state (FIG. 89(c)) (ST exit). In this case, the number of time reductions in the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)) is 9950 times. Therefore, it can be said that even in the premonitory state that has been shifted to due to ST omission, it is virtually guaranteed that the next jackpot will be won. In other words, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is the special symbol D, it can be said that winning the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. In addition, when the variable probability state is set, if a jackpot is won in 50 big prize drawings, the variable probability state is set again after the end of the large prize game, regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won in the 50th big prize lottery, but the jackpot is won in the 51st and subsequent major prize draws, the probability change state is set only with a 5% probability after the big prize game ends. Therefore, when the probability variable state is set, the player aims to win the jackpot in 50 or less major lottery draws.

As mentioned above, if the game progresses with real variable targets in accordance with the original gameplay, if you win a jackpot, the gaming state after the big win will be in one of the time saving state, portent state, latent state, or probability variable state. Set.

The time-saving state and premonition state have in common that the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state. On the other hand, the premonition state is essentially guaranteed to produce the next big win, whereas the time-saving state differs in that there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end and the game state will transition to the normal state (Figure 89 (a)).

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating switch management processing in the main control board 300 according to the second embodiment. The switch management process according to the second embodiment is executed in place of the switch management process according to the simultaneous reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is being turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s has been turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process moves to step S500-3.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passage process based on passage of the game ball to the gate 124. Note that this gate passing process is the same as the gate passing process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal game operating port detection switch is on-detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the normal game operating port 125 and the detection signal from the normal game operating port detection switch 125s is turned on. . As a result, if it is determined that the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is turned on, the process moves to step S510, and if it is determined that the ordinary figure actuation opening detection switch is not turned on, the process goes to step S500-5. move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passing process based on the entry of a game ball into the normal operation port 125. This gate passing process is the same as the gate passing process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 120 and a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 120s. If it is determined that the first start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the game ball entering the first starting port 120. Note that this first starting port passing process is the same as the first starting port passing process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second fixed starting port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the second fixed starting port 122A and a detection signal is input from the second fixed starting port detection switch 122As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the second fixed starting port detection switch is on, the process moves to step S530, and if it is determined that the second fixed starting port detection switch is not on, step S500-9 Processing is moved to .

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the game ball entering the second fixed starting port 122A. Note that this second starting port passing process is the same as the second starting port passing process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second variable start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the second variable start hole 122B and a detection signal has been input from the second variable start hole detection switch 122Bs. If it is determined that the second variable start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that the second variable start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-11.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second variable starting port 122B. Note that this second starting port passing process is the same as the second starting port passing process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the big winning hole detection switch is on-detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the big winning hole 126 and a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch 126s. As a result, if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is on, the process moves to step S540, and if it is determined that the big winning opening detection switch is not on, the process moves to step S500-13. .

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball enters the grand prize opening 126 properly, and when it is determined that the game ball enters the grand prize opening 126 properly, the main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball enters the grand prize opening 126 properly. A grand prize opening passage process is executed to transmit a grand prize opening entry command indicating the entry of a game ball to the sub-control board 330. In addition, this big winning a prize opening passing process is the same as the big winning a prize opening passing process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous spinning reference example.

(S500-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the variable probability area detection switch is on-detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the variable probability area 140a and a detection signal is input from the variable probability area detection switch 140s. As a result, if it is determined that the probability variable area detection switch is on-detected, the process moves to step S550, and if it is determined that the probability variable area detection switch-on is not detected, the switch management process ends.

(Step S550)
The main CPU 300a executes a variable probability area passing process to determine whether the game ball has entered the variable probability area 140a properly. Note that details of this variable probability region passing process will be described later.

Figure 91 is a flowchart explaining the process of passing through the variable probability area (step S550) in the main control board 300 in the second embodiment.

(Step S550-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the probability change area valid period flag, which indicates that the entry of the game ball into the probability change area 140a is considered valid, is on. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the probability change area valid period flag is turned on at the start of the second round of play, and is turned off when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed after the end of the second round of play. If it is judged that the probability change area valid period flag is on, the process proceeds to step S550-3, and if it is judged that the probability change area valid period flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S550-5.

(Step S550-3)
The main CPU 300a turns on the variable probability region passage flag.

(Step S550-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process and ends the probability variable area passing process.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating the number cut management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the second embodiment. The number-of-times management process according to the second embodiment is executed in place of the number-of-times management process of the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time-saving count, i.e., the counter value of the time-saving count off counter, is greater than 0. As a result, if it is judged that the time-saving count is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and if it is judged that the time-saving count is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-9.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time saving counter.

(Step S613-5)
In the above step S613-3, the main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value (time-saving count) has been updated to 0. As a result, if it is judged that the time-saving count is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-7, and if it is judged that the time-saving count is not 0, the process proceeds to step S613-9.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time-saving state flag in order to set the normal game state to the non-time-saving game state. As a result, after the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, the normal game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state at the start of the change when the change count reaches the time-saving count (here, 50 times or 10,000 times).

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the number of high probability times, i.e., the counter value of the high probability times off counter, is greater than 0. As a result, if it is judged that the number of high probability times is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-11, and if it is judged that the number of high probability times is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-17.

(Step S613-11)
The main CPU 300a decrements the high-accuracy count counter.

(Step S613-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value (high probability number of times) has been updated to 0 in step S613-11. As a result, if it is determined that the high probability count is 0, the process moves to step S613-15, and if it is determined that the high probability count is not 0, the process moves to step S613-17.

(Step S613-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol probability state flag in order to set the special game state to a low probability game state. As a result, after the special game state is set to the low probability game state, the special game state is changed to the low probability game state at the start of fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the high probability number (50 times in this case). That will happen.

(Step S613-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the first special number of times counter is larger than 0 based on the number of major prize draws based on special 1 pending and the number of major prize lottery based on special 2 pending after the end of the major prize game. . As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the first special number of times counter is larger than 0, the process moves to step S613-19, and if it is determined that the counter value of the first special number of times counter is 0, The process moves to step S613-21.

(Step S613-19)
The main CPU 300a decrements the first special number of times counter.

(Step S613-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a first special number command indicating the counter value of the first special number counter.

(Step S613-23)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the second special number counter based on the number of big role lotteries based on the special 2 reservation after the end of the big role game is greater than 0. As a result, if it is judged that the counter value of the second special number counter is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-25, and if it is judged that the counter value of the second special number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-29.

(Step S613-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the symbols on the second special symbol display 162 have started to change. As a result, if it is determined that the symbols on the second special symbol display 162 have started to fluctuate, the process moves to step S613-27, and it is determined that the symbols on the second special symbol display 162 have not started to fluctuate. If so, the process moves to step S613-29.

(Step S613-27)
The main CPU 300a decrements the second special number of times counter.

(Step S613-29)
The main CPU 300a sets a second special number command indicating the counter value of the second special number counter. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special number command, which is a combination of the first special number of times command and the second special number of times command, is used to transmit the special number of times command and the second special number of times command, without sending the first special number of times command and the second special number of times command individually. It is transmitted to the sub control board 330 at the time of start.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop symbol display process (step S630) in the main control board 300 according to the second embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the second embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol related to the reservation type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. . As a result, if it is determined that the display is stopped, the process moves to step S630-5, and if it is determined that the display is not stopped, the process moves to step S630-31.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S620-23 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S630-31, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S630-7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the results of the major lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the major lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that the game is a loss, the process moves to step S630-29, and if it is determined that the game is not a loss, the process moves to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process is transferred to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a pattern forced stop process.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the initial state.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets data in the special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the determined type of special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessory maximum activation count setting process. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-15 above, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter. . In addition, this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big prize game that will start from now. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big winning game, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves the predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command in the transmission buffer to transmit the start of the big prize game to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H".

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. Through this process, a jackpot signal will be output with the start of the big prize game (opening).

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state confirmation designation command when a special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the gaming state when the special symbol is confirmed, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). If it is judged that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the process for displaying the special symbol stop symbols is terminated, and if it is judged that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the process proceeds to step S630-39.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing target identification value and moves the process to step S630-3.

Figure 94 is a flow chart explaining the large prize opening end wait process (S670) in the main control board 300 in the second embodiment. The large prize opening end wait process in the second embodiment is executed in place of the large prize opening end wait process in the simultaneous rotation reference example described above.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the corresponding big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", The process moves to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming status, high accuracy number, and time saving number set in the preliminary area (preliminary counter) in step S610-29 or step S610-75.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the variable probability region passage flag.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a special gaming state based on the probability variable area passage flag loaded in step S670-5. Here, if the probability variable area passing flag is an on flag, a high probability gaming state is set, and if the probability variable area passing flag is an off flag, a low probability gaming state is set.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a judges in step S670-7 whether the high probability gaming state has been set. If it is judged that the high probability gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to step S670-11, and if it is judged that the high probability gaming state has not been set, the process proceeds to step S670-13.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the high-accuracy number-cutting counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal gaming state based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the time-saving cut-off counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the first special number of times counter. Here, if the game state set after the end of the big prize game is the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), or the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), The counter value of the 1 special number of times counter is set to 50 times. Further, when the game state set after the end of the big prize game is a precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), the counter value of the first special number of times counter is set to 0 times.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the second special number of times counter. Here, if the game state set after the end of the big prize game is the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), or the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), The counter value of the 1 special number of times counter is set to 50 times. Further, when the game state set after the end of the big prize game is a precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), the counter value of the first special number of times counter is set to 0 times.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big role game.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a sets number commands corresponding to the high accuracy number and time saving number in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning slot. As a result, if the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in the main performance display section 200a according to the second embodiment. When the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the first background effect shown in FIG. 95(a) is executed in the main effect display section 200a. In the first background effect, the words "Challenge mode" indicating that the gaming state is in the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)) are displayed at the upper right corner of the main effect display section 200a, and the remaining number of times in the time saving state is displayed. A display indicating the remaining number of times will be displayed. The display of the remaining number of times in the first background effect is initially displayed as "50 times" when the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)). After that, when the special 1 variation or the special 2 variation is started, the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display in the first background effect is subtracted and updated and displayed.

Further, when the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), the second background effect shown in FIG. 95(b) is executed in the main effect display section 200a. In the second background effect, the words "ST mode" indicating that the gaming state is a latent state (FIG. 89(d)) are displayed in the upper right corner of the main effect display section 200a, and the number of times remaining in the latent state is displayed. A display indicating the remaining number of times will be displayed. The remaining number of times display in the second background effect is initially displayed as "50 times" when the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the latent state (FIG. 89(d)). Thereafter, when the special 1 fluctuation or special 2 fluctuation is started, the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display is subtracted and updated and displayed.

Further, when the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)), the third background effect shown in FIG. 95(c) is executed in the main effect display section 200a. In the third background effect, the words "W loop mode" indicating that the gaming state is in a variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)) are displayed in the upper right corner of the main effect display section 200a, and 89(e)) is displayed indicating the remaining number of times. The remaining number of times display in the third background effect is initially displayed as "50 times" when the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)). Thereafter, when the special 2 variation is started, the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display in the third background effect is subtracted and updated. In other words, if the special 1 variation starts after the game state after the end of the big winning game is set to the probability variable state (FIG. 89(e)), the remaining number of times display in the third background effect is not updated, and the special When the second variation starts, the remaining number of times display in the third background effect will be updated. Therefore, the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display in the third background effect does not necessarily match the remaining number of times in the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)).

That is, for example, if the 50th change after the end of the big winning game is set to the probability change state (FIG. 89(e)) is the special 1 change, the game state changes to the precursor state (FIG. 89(e)). 89(c)) (ST exit), the remaining count display in the third background effect is not updated as described above. Therefore, although the gaming state shifts from the probability change state (FIG. 89(e)) to the portent state (FIG. 89(c)), the display is maintained without being updated, so the special 1 fluctuation is As long as the execution continues, the remaining number of times will not reach "0 times".

As described above, when a big winning game is executed, the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)), the portent state (FIG. 89(c)), the latent state (FIG. 89(d)), and the variable probability state (FIG. 89(d)) The gaming state changes to either (e)). In the short time state (Fig. 89(b)), the precursor state (Fig. 89(c)), the latent state (Fig. 89(d)), and the definite variable state (Fig. 89(e)), the real change target is special 2 pending. Therefore, if the special 1 reservation changes, there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

In the second embodiment, when the special 1 fluctuation starts while the third background effect is being executed, the remaining count display in the third background effect is not updated, which is a visually easy-to-understand effect. It becomes possible to inform the player that it is inappropriate to play the game at This makes it possible to encourage the player to play an appropriate game and to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage.

In addition, if the game state after the end of the big prize game is set to the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)), or the remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 95(c) above is updated and the remaining number of times is "0". When reaching , the fourth background effect shown in FIG. 95(d) is executed. In the fourth background effect, the words "Foreshadow mode" indicating that the gaming state is in the foreshadowing state (FIG. 89(c)) are displayed in the upper right corner of the main effect display section 200a, and the words "Foreshadowing mode" are displayed in the upper right corner of the main effect display section 200a. The words "Next time confirmed!?" are displayed, indicating that the jackpot is guaranteed. That is, in the fourth background effect, the remaining number of times in the first to third background effects as shown in FIGS. 95(a) to 95(c) described above is not displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 95(a) to 95(d), the lower part of the main effect display section 200a shows the special 2 reservation read out to the processing area (0th storage section) at the time of the big winning lottery. The reservation display 212a, a first reservation display 212b, a second reservation display 212c, a third reservation display 212d, which respectively indicate the reservations stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special figure reservation storage area. A hold display area 211 in which a fourth hold display 212e is displayed is provided, and a hold display effect and a change in the display pattern of the hold display 212 (hereinafter referred to as hold change effect) are executed in the same manner as in the reference example described above. Ru.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, if a new special 1 hold is stored after the end of a major role game, the execution of the hold change performance is prohibited, and the display pattern of the hold display 212 is not changed again.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the special 1 reservation is newly stored after the end of the big prize game, at the timing when the special 2 reservation is confirmed immediately after that (the special symbol stop designation command related to the special 2 reservation is received), The pending change effect being executed is forcibly terminated, and all pending displays 212 are changed to "default (white)". It should be noted that the prohibition on execution of the pending change performance ends at the timing when the big winning game is executed or the gaming state shifts to the normal state (FIG. 89(a)). In addition, in the second embodiment, a pending change effect is taken as an example of a prefetch effect, but a prefetch effect different from the pending change effect may be further provided. In this case, as well as the above-mentioned hold change performance, if the special 1 hold is newly stored after the end of the big role game, execution of the new look-ahead effect is prohibited, and the special 2 hold is confirmed (special 2 hold It is also possible to forcibly end the pre-reading effect that is being executed at the timing when the special figure stop designation command related to is received).

Further, when the special 1 reservation is newly stored after the end of the big winning game, a pre-reading effect that prohibits execution and a pre-reading effect that does not prohibit execution may be provided. Furthermore, the timing for forcibly ending the prefetch effect that is currently being executed is not limited to the above example. For example, it is possible to forcibly end the pre-reading performance that is being executed at the timing of the start of the fluctuation related to the next special 2 hold.

This makes it possible to notify the player that it is inappropriate to play the game with special 1 pending by executing a penalty (prohibition of pending change effect) that does not affect the gaming profit. This makes it possible to encourage the player to play an appropriate game and to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the above-mentioned performance will be explained. Note that the processing related to the above-mentioned performance will be explained below, and other processing and processing that is the same as the above-mentioned performance reference example will be omitted. Also, in the following explanation, the order of the actual processing may differ to make it easier to understand.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating the prefetch designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the second embodiment. The prefetch designation command is set in the acquisition performance determination process and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process. The prefetch designation command reception process according to the second embodiment is executed in place of the prefetch designation command reception process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous execution reference example.

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command related to a substantial change target has been received. As a result, if a lookahead designation command related to a real change target is received, the process moves to step S1210-5, and if a lookahead designation command related to a real change target is not received, the process goes to step S1210-15. move.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330a stores the preliminary determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1 above. Note that the sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination information storage section corresponding to the second special symbol reservation storage area. An information storage section is provided. The first preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections, a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first preliminary determination information storage section correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second preliminary determination information storage section includes four storage sections, a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and the first storage section to fourth storage section of these second preliminary determination information storage section are as follows: They respectively correspond to the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, among the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage section corresponding to the storage section in which the reservation is newly stored is stored. Pre-determination information is stored in .

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not a prefetch prohibition flag indicating prohibition against execution of a prefetch effect is on. As a result, if the prefetching prohibition flag is on, the process moves to step S1210-13, and if the prefetching prohibition flag is off, the process moves to step S1210-9.
(Step S1210-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a final pending display pattern determination process to determine the final display pattern of the pending display 212. Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 66(a)) is referred to, and the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined and stored.

(Step S1210-11)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times to determine the display pattern of the hold display 212, that is, the change timing of the hold display 212, based on the storage unit in which the hold is stored, and updates the previous hold display pattern determination table by the derived number of times. With reference to (FIG. 66(b)), the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the hold display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit.

(Step S1210-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process to start displaying the hold display 212 based on the decisions in steps S1210-9 and S1210-11, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. Note that if it is determined in step S1210-7 that the prefetch prohibition flag is on, display of the hold display 212 is started in "default (white)". Thereby, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

(Step S1210-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the current gaming state is the normal state (FIG. 89(a)). As a result, if the current gaming state is not the normal state, the process moves to step S1210-17, and if the current gaming state is the normal state, the prefetch designation command reception process ends.

(Step S1210-17)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the prefetch prohibition flag and ends the prefetch designation command reception process.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating the special figure stop designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the second embodiment. After the special symbol stop designation command is set in step S620-21 of the special symbol variation process, it is transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1230-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 has been received. As a result, if a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is received, the process moves to step S1230-3, and the second special symbol display 162 displays the special symbol. If the special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed has not been received, the special symbol stop designation command reception process is ended.

(Step S1230-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the prefetch prohibition flag is on. As a result, if the prefetching prohibition flag is on, the process moves to step S1230-5, and if the prefetching prohibition flag is off, the special figure stop designation command reception process is ended.

(Step S1230-5)
The sub CPU 330a displays all the pending displays 212 in "default (white)" and ends the special figure stop designation command reception process.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating the game state change designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the second embodiment. After the game state change designation command is set in steps S610-37 and S610-83 of the special symbol change waiting process, and step S670-21 of the big winning opening end wait process, it is set in step S100- of the CPU initialization process. 65.

(Step S1240-1)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received gaming state change designation command.

(Step S1240-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the gaming state has transitioned to the time saving state (FIG. 89(b)). As a result, if the gaming state has transitioned to the time saving state, the process moves to step S1240-5, and if the gaming state has not transitioned to the time saving state, the process moves to step S1240-9.

(Step S1240-5)
The sub CPU 330a executes a first background effect execution process that starts displaying the first background effect (FIG. 95(a)) on the main effect display section 200a.

(Step S1240-7)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the first flag indicating that the first background effect is being executed, and ends the game state change designation command reception process.

(Step S1240-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the gaming state has transitioned to the latent state (FIG. 89(d)). As a result, if the gaming state has transitioned to the latent state, the process moves to step S1240-11, and if the gaming state has not transitioned to the latent state, the process moves to step S1240-15.

(Step S1240-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes a second background effect execution process that starts displaying the second background effect (FIG. 95(b)) on the main effect display section 200a.

(Step S1240-13)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on a second flag indicating that the second background performance is being executed, and ends the game state change designation command receiving process.

(Step S1240-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the gaming state has transitioned to the variable probability state (FIG. 89(e)). As a result, if the gaming state has transitioned to the variable probability state, the process moves to step S1240-17, and if the gaming state has not changed to the variable probability state, the process moves to step S1240-21.

(Step S1240-17)
The sub CPU 330a executes a third background effect execution process that starts displaying the third background effect (FIG. 95(c)) on the main effect display section 200a.

(Step S1240-19)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on a third flag indicating that the third background performance is being executed, and ends the game state change designation command receiving process.

(Step S1240-21)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the gaming state has transitioned to the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)). As a result, if the gaming state has transitioned to the precursor state, the process moves to step S1240-23, and if the gaming state has not transitioned to the precursor state, the process moves to step S1240-27.

(Step S1240-23)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the third flag is off or not. If the third flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1240-25. If the third flag is on, the sub-CPU 330a ends the game state change command reception process.

(Step S1240-25)
The sub CPU 330a executes a fourth background effect execution process that starts displaying the fourth background effect (FIG. 95(d)) on the main effect display section 200a. Here, when the gaming state has transitioned to the precursor state (step S1240-21) and when the third flag is off (step S1240-23), special symbols are This is a case where B is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 and the gaming state after the big prize game transitions to the precursor state (FIG. 89(c)). Note that the third flag is turned on in step S12410-19, and turned off in step S1240-31 or step S1250-17, which will be described later.

(Step S1240-27)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the gaming state has transitioned to the normal state (FIG. 89(a)). As a result, if the gaming state has transitioned to the normal state, the process moves to step S1240-29, and if the gaming state has not transitioned to the normal state, the gaming state change designation command receiving process ends.

(Step S1240-29)
The sub CPU 330a executes a background effect execution process to display a predetermined background on the main effect display section 200a. Here, for example, an addictive prevention display may be displayed, or a special background may be displayed to prevent the player from immediately ending the game.

(Step S1240-31)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag, respectively, and ends the game state change designation command reception process.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating the special number of times command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the second embodiment. After the special count command is set in steps S613-21 and S613-29 of the count cut management process, it is transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1250-1)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received special number of times command.

(Step S1250-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether either the first flag or the second flag is on. As a result, if either the first flag or the second flag is on, the process moves to step S1250-5, and if either the first flag or the second flag is not on, the process moves to step S1250-5. -9.

(Step S1250-5)
The sub CPU 330a compares the first special number of times and the second special number of times based on the analysis result of step S1250-1.

(Step S1250-7)
Based on the comparison result in step S1250-5, the sub CPU 330a updates the remaining number of times display in the main effect display section 200a to the smaller of the first special number of times and the second special number of times, and performs the special number of times command reception process. end.

(Step S1250-9)
The sub-CPU 330a determines whether the third flag is on or not. If the third flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1250-11. If the third flag is not on, the sub-CPU 330a ends the special count command reception process.

(Step S1250-11)
Based on the analysis result of step S1250-1, the sub-CPU 330a determines whether the second special number of times is greater than 0. If the second special number of times is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1250-13. If the second special number of times is 0, the process proceeds to step S1250-15.

(Step S1250-13)
The sub-CPU 330a updates the remaining number of times display in the main performance display section 200a to the value of the second special number of times, and ends the special number of times command reception process. Note that if the value of the second special number of times has not changed, the remaining number of times display in the main performance display section 200a is maintained.

(Step S1250-15)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a fourth background effect execution process for displaying the fourth background effect shown in Fig. 95(d). That is, when the remaining number of times display shown in Fig. 95(c) is updated and the remaining number of times reaches "0 times", the fourth background effect shown in Fig. 95(d) is executed.

(Step S1250-17)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the third flag and ends the special number command reception process.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the opening designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the second embodiment. After the opening designation command is set in step S630-21 of the special symbol stop symbol display process, it is transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1260-1)
The sub CPU 330a executes an opening performance execution process that executes a predetermined opening performance.

(Step S1260-3)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag, respectively, and ends the opening designation command reception process.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. It is clear that those skilled in the art can come up with various changes and modifications within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these naturally fall within the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

In the above examples, we have described the case of a so-called simultaneous spin machine, but the present invention can also be applied to so-called first-type gaming machines, second-type gaming machines, and first-type and second-type mixed machines.

In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on again when a power outage occurs, an image related to the return of the screen display is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is not necessary to display the image related to the return of the screen display until the main effect display section 200a displays the effect image corresponding to the gaming state and the image of the suspended display effect. In addition, until the main effect display section 200a displays the effect image according to the gaming state and the image of the suspended display effect, only one of the message image indicating that the screen display is being returned or the message image allowing the game to continue is displayed. It may also be displayed.

In the first embodiment, the command reception interrupt process is executed even before SATA preparation is completed. However, in the sub CPU initialization process, interrupts may be disabled until the SATA preparation process is completed, and the command reception interrupt process may not be executed before the SATA preparation is completed.

In the first embodiment, the SATA preparation is performed by the display control CPU 350a, which develops the image data such as the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c and the background stored in the image ROM 350b into the image RAM 350c, and displays the image data as the main effect. 200a. However, the SATA preparation is such that the sub CPU 330a develops image data such as the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c and the background stored in the sub ROM 330b into the sub RAM 330c, and displays the image data on the main effect display section 200a. You may also prepare for

In the first embodiment, the time required for the SATA preparation process is set to 8 to 10 seconds, but the time is not limited to this. The time required for the SATA preparation process may be less than 8 seconds, or may be 10 seconds or more.

In the first embodiment, the main control board 300 sets the wait processing time to 8 to 10 seconds during the CPU initialization processing, but the invention is not limited to this. The wait processing time may be less than 8 seconds, or may be 10 seconds or more.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sub-control board 330 waits for the completion of the SATA preparation process, but this is not essential. Therefore, for example, when the sub control board 330 recovers from a power outage, the process of restoring various images based on the command received from the main control board 300 is performed regardless of whether the SATA preparation process is completed or not. You may go.

The types of commands and the triggers and timing for sending the various commands in the first embodiment are merely examples. Therefore, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to send all of the commands shown in FIG. 76.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a case has been described in which a game state is provided by a combination of a high probability game state, a low probability game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state, but the game state is not limited to this. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, a case is shown in which the total number of times of big prize drawings based on special 1 pending and special winnings drawings based on special 2 pending until the end of the time saving gaming state is set as the time saving number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of regular lottery drawings until the end of the time saving game state may be set as the number of time saving times.

Alternatively, as the number of time-saving games, the total number of big prize drawings based on special 1 pending until the time-saving gaming state ends, the number of big prize drawings based on special 2-holding, and the general lottery number until the time-saving gaming state ends. Both the number of times of lottery may be set as the number of time saving times. In this case, the remaining number of times display in the background effect is updated based on the execution of the general drawing lottery, and the remaining number of times display in the background effect is not updated based on the execution of the major winning lottery related to Toku 1 reservation or Toku 2 reservation. It may also be a thing.

Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the remaining number of times display is updated and displayed is subtracted (counted down) is shown, but the number of times display may be updated and displayed so that it is counted up from 0.

Further, the effects in the above embodiments are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the design can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the above embodiment, a simultaneous spinning machine has been described, but any of winning order, special 2 priority competition, and special 1 priority competition may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which six levels of set values are provided, but no set values may be provided, and the number of set values is not particularly limited. Further, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on the set value. However, what differs depending on the setting value is not limited to this.

Further, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as areas where game balls can be shot separately. However, the board configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

Note that the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the starting region of the present invention.
Further, various random numbers (jackpot determination random numbers, winning symbol random numbers, fluctuating pattern random numbers) related to the big winning lottery in the first embodiment correspond to the predetermined information of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a that executes the special symbol random number acquisition process in the first embodiment corresponds to the predetermined information acquisition means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a that executes the special symbol hit determination process in the first embodiment corresponds to the determination means of the present invention.
Furthermore, the main CPU 300a that executes the processes shown in FIGS. 43 to 47 in the first embodiment corresponds to the gaming profit granting means of the present invention.
Furthermore, the effect image (background image) in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the specific image of the present invention.
Further, the images of the pending display 212 and the pending number display 214 in the first embodiment correspond to the predetermined image of the present invention.
Further, the main effect display section 200a in the first embodiment corresponds to the image display section of the present invention.
Further, the sub CPU 330a that executes the processes shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 in the first embodiment corresponds to the effect execution means of the present invention.
Further, the reception of the special figure stop designation command or the opening designation command in the first embodiment corresponds to the first trigger of the present invention. Moreover, it is not limited to this, and it can be said that the special symbol fluctuation processing or the special symbol stop symbol display processing of the main control board 300 in the first embodiment corresponds to the first opportunity of the present invention. Furthermore, it can be said that the stop display of the determined special symbols on the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 in the first embodiment corresponds to the first opportunity of the present invention. In addition, the first aspect of the present invention is that the jackpot or small win in the first embodiment has been won, or that the jackpot or small win has been confirmed, or that the big win game or the small win game has started. It can be said that this corresponds to the opportunity for
Furthermore, the reception of the pending number recognition command in the first embodiment corresponds to the second trigger of the present invention. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be said that the special symbol random number acquisition process of the main control board 300 in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the second opportunity of the present invention. In addition, the game ball has entered the first starting port 120 and the second starting port 122 in the first embodiment, or the main control board 300 has acquired the jackpot determination random number, the winning symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. This can be said to correspond to the second motivation of the present invention.

100 Gaming machine 116 Gaming area 120 First starting port 122 Second starting port 200a Main performance display section 300 Main control board 300a Main CPU
300b main ROM
300c main RAM
330 Sub control board 330a Sub CPU
330b sub ROM
330c sub RAM

Claims (1)

a starting area provided in the gaming area where the gaming balls flow;
Predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area;
determining means for determining validity based on the predetermined information;
a gaming profit granting means for granting a gaming profit to the player based on the determination result of winning being derived from the winning determination;
Effect execution means for displaying an image for effect on an image display unit, including a background image and a predetermined image corresponding to the predetermined information and suggesting the predetermined number of information ;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
After power is turned on, if a predetermined command is received , the background image is displayed and the predetermined image is not displayed;
When the predetermined information is acquired after power is turned on, the predetermined image can be displayed if the background image is displayed, and the predetermined image is not displayed if the background image is not displayed. A gaming machine.

Images